Owners Manual
10/07/17 09:33:49 31TK8600_002
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2011 Honda Odyssey was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
i
10/07/17 09:33:54 31TK8600_003
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials − special
handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
ii
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:34:04 31TK8600_004
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
iii
10/07/17 09:34:16 31TK8600_006
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ........................................... 61
Features (climate control, audio, steering wheel, rear entertainment, security, cruise control, and HomeLink ) ... 217
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 539
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 557
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 597
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ......................................... 653
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)............................................... 685
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 703
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 707
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
00X31-TK8-6001
© Amerian Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
2011 Odyssey
1
10/07/17 09:34:32 31TK8600_007
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
entertainment and other
convenience features.
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Maintenance
The Maintenance MinderTM shows
you when you need to take your
vehicle to the dealer for maintenance
service. There is also a list of things
to check and instructions on how to
check them.
Features
How to operate the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system, the audio system, rear
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how
to
handle
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onP
r
ovi
dedby: them.
2
2011 Odyssey
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
and technical information.
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
10/07/19 15:50:04 31TK8600_008
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.63)
GAUGES (P.77)
MOONROOF
SWITCH* (P.195)
HOMELINK
BUTTONS (P.483)
HEATING AND
COOLING SYSTEM*(P.218)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM*
(P.225)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P.582)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM*
(P.190)
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P.9, 26)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.198)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P.582)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.155)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.561)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.192)
USB ADAPTER CABLE*
(P.288, 298, 385, 395)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.541)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.544)
* : If equipped
MIRROR CONTROL
AUTO BUTTON*
(P.197)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.199)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.211)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
3
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 26)
10/07/19 15:50:11 31TK8600_009
Your Vehicle at a Glance
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS*2
(P.136)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*2
(P.411)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.480)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.135)
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES*2 (P.189)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) OFF SWITCH
(P.571)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.33)
BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
(BSI) OFF SWITCH*2
(P.585)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.142)
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCH*2
(P.169)
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH*2
(P.163)
PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH*2
(P.486)
VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS*2
(P.496, 517)
AUDIO SYSTEM(P.234)
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM*2
(P.414, 442)
HORN*1
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.412)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.143)
BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK
BUTTONS*2 (P.496, 517)
COOL BOX SWITCH*2
(P.209)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*2 (P.83)
*1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering
wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
o
vi
dedby:
*2 : If equipped
4
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:34:52 31TK8600_010
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 12
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 13
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 14
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Additional Safety Precautions .... 18
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 20
Seat Belt System Components ... 20
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensionners.............................. 22
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23
Additional Information About Your
Airbags ...................................... 24
Airbag System Components ....... 24
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 26
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 31
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 33
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 33
Airbag Service .............................. 34
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 36
All Children Must Be
Restrained
...............................
. 36
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat ............................................ 37
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 37
If You Must Drive with
Several Children ...................... 39
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 39
Additional Safety Precautions .... 39
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 41
Protecting Infants ........................ 41
Protecting Small Children .......... 42
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 44
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 45
With LATCH ................................ 46
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 50
With a Tether ............................... 52
Protecting Larger Children ............ 54
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 54
Using a Booster Seat ................... 55
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 56
Additional Safety Precautions .... 57
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58
Safety Labels .................................... 59
5
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
10/07/17 09:35:03 31TK8600_011
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 15 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 36 − 57 ).
6
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Pay Appropriate Attention to the
Task of Driving Safely
Engaging in mobile phone
conversation or other activities that
keep you from paying close attention
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
to the road, other vehicles and
pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change
quickly, and only you can decide
when it is safe to divert attention
away from driving.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 599 ).
10/07/17 09:35:10 31TK8600_012
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(9)
(12) (3) (9)
(6)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(5)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
the correct position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
7
Driver and Passenger Safety
(8)
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
10/07/17 09:35:21 31TK8600_013
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including:
− frontal impacts
− side impacts
− rear impacts
− rollovers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
2011 Odyssey
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
10/07/17 09:35:28 31TK8600_014
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
26 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 30 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page 31 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
10/07/17 09:35:34 31TK8600_015
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
collisions, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
2011 Odyssey
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
10/07/17 09:35:42 31TK8600_016
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 36 − 57 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
On Touring models
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate open indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
The door and tailgate open indicator
appears on the multi-information
display to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
11
10/07/17 09:35:52 31TK8600_017
Protecting Adults and Teens
When one or more doors are open,
the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’ message will
come on.
When the tailgate is not tightly
closed, the ‘‘TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
When both tailgate and one or more
doors are not tightly closed, the
‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’
message will come on.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
reduces the chance of someone
being thrown out of the vehicle
during a crash, and it helps prevent
passengers from accidentally
opening a door or the tailgate and
falling out.
Locking the doors and the tailgate
also helps prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate when you come to a stop.
See page 155 for how to lock the
doors and the tailgate, and page
75 for how the door and tailgate
open indicator works.
Except Touring models
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See page 156 for
how to set them.
On Touring models
This vehicle has auto door locking/
unlocking features. See pages
120 and 122 for how to set them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
12
2.Adjust the Front Seats
2011 Odyssey
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
10/07/17 09:36:01 31TK8600_018
Protecting Adults and Teens
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 143 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
After you adjust a manual seat, rock
it back and forth to make sure the
seat is locked in position.
See page 175 for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page 176 for a manual adjustment.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
13
10/07/17 09:36:09 31TK8600_019
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See pages 175 and 177 for how to
adjust the seat-backs.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
14
2011 Odyssey
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 179 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
10/07/17 09:36:17 31TK8600_020
Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The center seating position of the
third row has a detachable seat belt
that can be unlatched and retracted
into the ceiling to allow the seat to be
folded down or for the belt to be
stored out of reach of a child. See
pages 187 and 188 for how to unlatch
and relatch the seat belt.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
On all models except LX
The multi-functional center seat that
can be installed in the center seating
position of the second row also has a
detachable seat belt.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
10/07/17 09:36:24 31TK8600_021
Protecting Adults and Teens
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
RELEASE
BUTTONS
The front seats and second row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of an anchor,
squeeze the two release buttons, and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
16
2011 Odyssey
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 20 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
10/07/17 09:36:29 31TK8600_022
Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Driver and Passenger Safety
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is safely parked and the
engine is off.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
17
10/07/17 09:36:37 31TK8600_023
Protecting Adults and Teens
Advice for Pregnant Women
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
18
Additional Safety Precautions
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:36:42 31TK8600_024
Protecting Adults and Teens
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
19
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
10/07/17 09:36:49 31TK8600_025
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
20
2011 Odyssey
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 90 ).
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
10/07/17 09:36:58 31TK8600_026
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
second row seat, that is touching
the rear of the seat-back.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 15 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 50 ).
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
21
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
10/07/17 09:37:06 31TK8600_027
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
Allowing a child to play with a
seat belt or wrap one around
their neck can result in serious
injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with
any seat belt and make sure
any unused seat belt a child
can reach is buckled, fully
retracted, and locked.
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating positions on the second
(except LX models) and third row
seats are equipped with a detachable
seat belt that has two parts: a small
latch plate and an anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 187 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
22
2011 Odyssey
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
10/07/17 09:37:13 31TK8600_028
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If the tensioner is activated, the SRS
indicator comes on and the tensioner
must be replaced.
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
636 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
23
Driver and Passenger Safety
The tensioners can be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
10/07/17 09:37:19 31TK8600_029
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(10) (2)
(9)
(8)(13)
(12)
(5)
(4)
(15)
(1)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3)
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5)
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Side Curtain Airbags
(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(4)
(8) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(9) Front Impact Sensors
(7)
(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(11) Side Impact Sensors
(12) Occupant Position Detection System
(OPDS) Sensors
(13) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(14) Rear Safing Sensor
(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
24
(6)
(11)
(11)
(4)
(11)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
(14)
10/07/17 09:37:28 31TK8600_030
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 30 ).
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 22 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 31 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 20 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page 29 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 29 ).
CONTINUED
25
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 31).
10/07/17 09:37:36 31TK8600_031
Additional Information About Your Airbags
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
(see page 32 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 33 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 33 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbag system
components (see page 32 ).
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will inflate
the driver’s and front passenger’s
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
26
How Your Front Airbags Work
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:37:44 31TK8600_032
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 33 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
27
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the airbag helps protect your
head and chest.
10/07/17 09:37:51 31TK8600_033
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dualstage, multiple-threshold front
airbags (SRS). During a frontal crash
severe enough to cause one or both
front airbags to deploy, the airbags
can inflate at different rates,
depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts
are latched, and/or other factors.
Front airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help
reduce the likelihood of head and
chest injuries in frontal crashes.
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children or small-statured adults who
ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Objects placed or pushed under
the front passenger’s seat may
cause the sensor to malfunction,
increasing the risk of injury in a
crash.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
28
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:37:59 31TK8600_034
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
DRIVER’S SEAT POSITION SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S SEAT WEIGHT SENSOR
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag is automatically turned off.
However, the passenger airbag off
indicator in this situation will not
come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
CONTINUED
29
Driver and Passenger Safety
When the passenger airbag gets
turned off by the weight sensors, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 33 ).
10/07/17 09:38:07 31TK8600_035
Additional Information About Your Airbags
A second row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat, the
floor behind it, or a folded second
row seat.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Second-row passengers should not
wedge objects or intentionally
force their feet under the front
passenger seat.
Also, make sure the floor mat behind
the front passenger’s seat is properly
positioned on the floor (see page
637 ). If it is not, the mat may
interfere with the proper operation
of the front passenger’s seat and its
sensors.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
30
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:38:17 31TK8600_036
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will
shut off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 33 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or another object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag.
CONTINUED
31
10/07/17 09:38:27 31TK8600_037
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a Rollover
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
One or both side curtain airbags may
inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal collision which causes the
front airbags to deploy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
32
2011 Odyssey
How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbag
system components.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
10/07/17 09:38:37 31TK8600_038
Additional Information About Your Airbags
On Touring models
If you see any of these indications,
the airbag system components may
not work properly when you need
them.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
U.S.
Canada
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
and then go off (see page 68 ). If it
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
page 90 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
U.S.
Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
33
Driver and Passenger Safety
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see
page 90 ).
10/07/17 09:38:46 31TK8600_039
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s) touching the rear of
the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
34
2011 Odyssey
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
10/07/17 09:38:52 31TK8600_040
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts and their anchors worn
during a crash to make sure they
are operating properly.
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009 in the US, or
Honda Customer Relations at
1-888-9-HONDA-9 in Canada.
another liquid soaks into the seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
35
Driver and Passenger Safety
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
10/07/17 09:39:00 31TK8600_041
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, traffic
collisions are the number one cause
of death of children age 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
36
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state,
Canadian province and territory
requires that infants and children be
properly restrained when they ride in
a vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 41 − 53 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 54 − 57 ).
10/07/17 09:39:11 31TK8600_042
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat. Some
states have laws restricting where
children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off under certain
circumstances (see page 33 ), please
follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 54 for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
CONTINUED
37
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to crash statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat.
10/07/17 09:39:23 31TK8600_043
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
38
2011 Odyssey
DASHBOARD
10/07/17 09:39:34 31TK8600_044
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 54 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see pages
175 and 176 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 17 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
15 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
CONTINUED
39
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
10/07/17 09:39:40 31TK8600_045
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is
activated, and the belt is fully
retracted and locked. If a child
wraps a loose seat belt around
their neck, they can be seriously
or fatally injured. (See pages
50 and 51 for how to activate
and deactivate the lockable
retractor.)
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors. This can prevent children
from accidentally falling out (see
page 162 ).
Use the power sliding door main
switch to prevent children from
operating the sliding doors. This
will prevent unintended use of the
doors.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states, Canadian provinces and
territories, and can be very
hazardous.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
40
2011 Odyssey
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
10/07/17 09:39:51 31TK8600_046
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
crash.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
41
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the second
or third row, but not in the front.
10/07/17 09:39:57 31TK8600_047
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
and weight are appropriate for a
rear-facing seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
Child Seat Type
Many states, Canadian provinces and
territories allow a child one year of
age or older who also meets the
minimum size and weight
requirements to transition from a
rear-facing child seat to a forward
facing seat. Know the requirements
where you are driving and follow the
child seat instructions. Many experts
recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two,
the
child’s
height
I
nf
oif
r
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
42
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:40:03 31TK8600_048
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 33 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Driver and Passenger Safety
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
43
10/07/17 09:40:10 31TK8600_049
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the rear seating
positions.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS
213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
44
2011 Odyssey
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
10/07/17 09:40:17 31TK8600_050
Installing a Child Seat
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
45
Driver and Passenger Safety
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
10/07/17 09:40:26 31TK8600_051
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) at each of the
second and third row seats, and the
second row center seat (except LX
models).
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
BUTTON
LOWER
ANCHORS
Using the Outer LATCH
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either outer second row seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors. InformationProvidedby:
46
2011 Odyssey
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
10/07/17 09:40:35 31TK8600_052
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER STRAP
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5. Lift the head restraint (see page
179 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
7. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
47
Driver and Passenger Safety
ANCHOR
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
TETHER
STRAP HOOK
10/07/17 09:40:43 31TK8600_053
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center LATCH
LOWER ANCHORS
COVER
1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page 187 ).
TETHER STRAP
2. Remove the covers on each lower
end of the seat-back by pulling on
the handles.
BUTTON
HANDLE
3. Follow step 1 through 4 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.
TETHER ANCHOR FITTING
ATTACHING CLIP
4. Lift the head restraint (see page
179 ), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the second row center seat
(except LX models), use the center
lower anchors as shown above.
5. Attach the attaching clip to the
anchor fitting, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
48
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:40:50 31TK8600_054
Installing a Child Seat
6. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in a third row seat:
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
2. After properly securing the child
seat (see pages 46 and 47 ), lift the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
49
Driver and Passenger Safety
1. Unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor latch and retract the seat
belt all the way into the ceiling.
Place the latch plate and anchor
latch in their holding slots (see
page 187 ).
10/07/17 09:40:57 31TK8600_055
Installing a Child Seat
3. You can also remove the rear head
restraints (see page 180 ). The
removed head restraints should be
secured in the cargo area so they
will not be thrown while you are
driving. Make sure to replace the
head restraints when the child
seats are not in use.
4. Follow steps 6 and 7 on page 47 .
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
second and third row, make sure the
detachable seat belt is securely
latched (see page 187 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
50
2011 Odyssey
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle and remove any slack from
the lap portion of the belt.
10/07/17 09:41:05 31TK8600_056
Installing a Child Seat
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
51
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
10/07/17 09:41:12 31TK8600_057
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row seats.
Second Row Installation
Outer Position
TETHER
STRAP HOOK
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see pages 50 and 51 ), lift the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the strap is
not twisted.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
52
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:41:21 31TK8600_058
Installing a Child Seat
Third Row Installation
Center Position (except LX models)
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
If the tether strap is too long and
cannot be tightened firmly, find a
route where the strap can be
tightened securely.
TETHER ANCHOR POINTS
Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seatback.
1. After properly securing the child
seat (see pages 50 and 51 ), lift the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
You can also remove the rear head
restraints (see
page
). The
187
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Driver and Passenger Safety
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
removed head restraints should be
secured in the cargo area so they will
not be thrown while you are driving.
Make sure to replace the head
restraints when the child seats are
not in use.
2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
53
10/07/17 09:41:29 31TK8600_059
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear the lap/
shoulder belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
54
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:41:37 31TK8600_060
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states, Canadian provinces and
territories also require children to
use a booster seat until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the states,
and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onprovinces
Pr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
55
Driver and Passenger Safety
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
44 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
territories where you intend to drive.
10/07/17 09:41:49 31TK8600_061
Protecting Larger Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 15 and 54 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
56
2011 Odyssey
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
10/07/17 09:41:54 31TK8600_062
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Driver and Passenger Safety
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
57
10/07/17 09:42:01 31TK8600_063
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in a collision that
may have damaged the underside.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
58
2011 Odyssey
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
10/07/17 09:42:14 31TK8600_064
Safety Labels
SUN VISORS
U.S. models
Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
59
10/07/17 09:42:24 31TK8600_065
Safety Labels
DOORJAMB
U.S. models
RADIATOR CAP
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
60
2011 Odyssey
Canadian models
10/07/17 09:42:28 31TK8600_066
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
2011 Odyssey
Seats ................................................ 175
Seat Heaters ................................... 189
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 190
Power Windows ............................. 192
Moonroof ........................................ 195
Mirrors ............................................ 197
Parking Brake ................................ 199
Interior Convenience Items .......... 201
Removable Center Console ...... 202
Flip-up Trash Bag Ring ............. 203
Beverage Holders ...................... 203
Integrated Sunshades ............... 205
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 206
Conversation Mirror ................. 207
Sun Visor .................................... 207
Vanity Mirror ............................. 208
Coat Hooks ................................. 208
Glove Box ................................... 208
Center Pocket ............................ 209
Cool Box ..................................... 209
Coin Box ..................................... 211
Accessory Power Sockets......... 211
AC Power Outlet ........................ 212
Interior Lights ................................ 213
61
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 62
Instrument Panel ............................. 63
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 65
Gauges .............................................. 77
Multi-Information Display .............. 83
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel .......................................... 134
Windshield Wipers and
Washers .................................. 135
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer .................................... 136
Turn Signal and Headlights.......... 136
Fog Lights ...................................... 139
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 140
Hazard Warning Button ................ 142
Rear Window Defogger ................ 142
Steering Wheel Adjustments ....... 143
Keys and Locks.............................. 144
Immobilizer System....................... 145
Ignition Switch ............................... 147
Remote Transmitter ...................... 148
Opening or Closing the Power
Sliding Doors .......................... 151
Opening or Closing the Power
Tailgate ................................... 151
Door Locks ..................................... 155
Power Door Locks ..................... 155
Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking ............................... 156
Childproof Door Locks ............. 162
Tailgate ........................................... 162
Power Tailgate ........................... 163
Sliding DoorsInf.................................
. 167
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10/07/19 15:50:18 31TK8600_067
Control Locations
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.63)
GAUGES (P.77)
MOONROOF SWITCH*
(P.195)
HOMELINK BUTTONS
(P.483)
HEATING AND COOLING
SYSTEM* (P.218)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM*
(P.225)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P.582)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY SYSTEM*
(P.190)
BSI ALERT INDICATOR*
(P.582)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.198)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.561)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.155)
USB ADAPTER CABLE*
(P.288, 298, 385, 395)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.192)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.541)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.544)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
* : If equipped
62
MIRROR CONTROL AUTO BUTTON*
(P.197)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.211)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
(P.199)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/19 15:50:28 31TK8600_068
Instrument Panel
LX, EX, EX-L models
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.71)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.75)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.73)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR*(P.76)
STARTER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.70)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P.76)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.75)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.69)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.75)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.73)
VSA OFF INDICATOR (P.69)
DAYTIME RUNNING
LIGHTS (DRL)
INDICATOR (P.73)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.69)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.65)
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
INDICATOR (P.72)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR (P.74)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR (P.67)
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.66)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.66)
POWER TAILGATE INDICATOR* (P.74)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.68)
DOOR and TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR (P.75)
PARKING SENSOR INDICATORS*(P.487)
POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR* (P.75)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR (P.68)
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
2011 Odyssey
63
Instruments and Controls
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.66)
10/07/19 15:50:37 31TK8600_069
Instrument Panel
Touring models
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.73)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.76)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR (P.71)
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P.76)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR (P.75)
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.75)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.66)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.75)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.69)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.73)
VSA OFF INDICATOR (P.69)
FOG LIGHT
INDICATOR (P.73)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.69)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.66)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR (P.74)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.66)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR (P.65)
*
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.70)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
DOOR and TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR (P.75)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.68)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.68)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
64
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:43:00 31TK8600_070
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 20 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEAT
BELT’’ or ‘‘FASTEN PASSENGER
SEAT BELT’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 90 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
65
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
10/07/17 09:43:09 31TK8600_071
Instrument Panel Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
For more information, see page
671 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 91 ).
Charging System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. If it comes on when the engine is
running, the battery is not being
charged, and you will see a
‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display or a ‘‘CHECK CHARGE
SYSTEM’’ message on the
information display, depending on
models.
2. This indicator also comes on when
the battery needs to be replaced
along with a ‘‘REPLACE
BATTERY’’ message on the multiinformation display or a
‘‘CHANGE BATT’’ message on
the information display, depending
on models. For more information,
see page 670 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
66
2011 Odyssey
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely
damaged if this indicator flashes
or stays on when the engine is
running. For more information,
see page 669 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message
on the multi-information display
(see page 91 ).
10/07/17 09:43:19 31TK8600_072
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake
and Brake
System
Indicator (Red)
This indicator has two functions:
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW’’ or ‘‘CHECK
BRAKE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 90 ).
Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your airbag system components.
For more information, see page 32 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
AIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page 90).
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on
the multi-information display (see
page 90 ) .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Instruments and Controls
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it remains on after you have
fully released the parking brake
while the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 672 .
67
10/07/17 09:43:27 31TK8600_073
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For more information, see page 33 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘PASSENGER
SIDE AIRBAG OFF’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page 90).
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on
for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the ABS. If this happens, have
your vehicle checked at a dealer.
With this indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
For more information, see page
568 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
68
2011 Odyssey
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 91).
10/07/17 09:43:37 31TK8600_074
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 570 ).
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, there is a problem with
the VSA system. Take your vehicle
to a dealer to have it checked.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal driving ability, but will not
have VSA traction and stability
enhancement. See page 570 for more
information on the VSA system.
VSA OFF Indicator
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle stability
assist (VSA) system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page 570 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSA
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 91 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
69
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly
coded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 145 ).
10/07/17 09:43:46 31TK8600_075
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Canada
Starter System
Indicator
This indicator comes on when there
is a problem with the starter system.
For more information, see page 559 .
Blind Spot Information
System (BSI) Indicator
On Touring models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK STARTER
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the starter system (see
page 92 ).
The BSI indicator also comes on if
the rear bumper becomes dirty while
driving. You will see a ‘‘BLIND
SPOT NOT AVAILABLE’’ message
on the multi-information display.
When you clean the rear bumper,
the indicator should go off after you
begin driving again.
When you turn the system on, the
indicator will turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
70
2011 Odyssey
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, there is a problem with
BSI. You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
BLIND SPOT SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display. If this
happens, take your vehicle to a
dealer, and have it checked (For
more information, see page 579 ).
When this indicator is on, BSI is not
working.
10/07/17 09:43:55 31TK8600_076
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
On Touring models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 655 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 683 ). For more
information, see page 572 .
This indicator has two functions:
1. If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 91 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
71
Instruments and Controls
On LX, EX, EX-L models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost pressure, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 655 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service.
Refer to page 574 for more
information.
10/07/17 09:44:02 31TK8600_077
Instrument Panel Indicators
2. If this indicator begins to flash,
there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS). You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display. The indicator continues to
flash for a while (approximately 1
minute), then stays on. If this
happens, have your dealer check
the system as soon as possible.
For more information, see page 577 .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
On LX, EX, EX-L models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked. For more
information, see page 573 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
72
2011 Odyssey
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages 628 and 631 ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
10/07/17 09:44:12 31TK8600_078
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator
On all models except LX
This indicator also comes on when
the light switch is in AUTO and the
lights turn on automatically.
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem in the high beam headlight’s
circuit. Take your vehicle to a dealer
to have it checked (see page 92 ).
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 137.
Instruments and Controls
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will remain on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door without the key in
the ignition switch.
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
Fog Light Indicator
On Touring models
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. See page
139 for information on fog light
operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
73
10/07/19 15:50:48 31TK8600_079
Instrument Panel Indicators
Washer Level Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘FUEL LOW’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 92 ).
On Canadian models
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
U.S.
Canada
Power Tailgate
Indicator
On EX-L models
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 620 ).
On Canadian Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘WASHER
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 92 ).
This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It
comes on as a reminder that you
must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 3.0 US gal (11.4 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
When the needle reaches E, there is
a very small amount of fuel in the
tank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
74
2011 Odyssey
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the power tailgate
system. Have the system checked by
your dealer as soon as possible. You
can still open or close the tailgate
manually. For more information on
the power tailgate, see page 162 .
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK POWER
TAILGATE SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
10/07/17 09:44:36 31TK8600_080
Instrument Panel Indicators
U.S.
Cruise Main Indicator
Canada
Power Sliding
Door Indicator
On EX and EX-L models
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK LEFT
SLIDING DOOR’’ or ‘‘CHECK
RIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’ message
on the multi-information display.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel (see page 480 ).
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
480 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Fuel Economy Indicator
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
It goes off when your vehicle uses
extra fuel.
The appropriate light comes on in
this indicator if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
All the lights in the indicator come
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
On Touring models
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The door and tailgate open indicator
also appears on the multi-information
display.
75
Instruments and Controls
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the power sliding door
system. With this indicator on, move
the main switch on the dashboard to
the OFF position, and have the
system checked by your dealer as
soon as possible. You can still open
or close each sliding door manually.
For more information on the power
sliding doors, see page 167 .
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator
10/07/17 09:44:46 31TK8600_081
Instrument Panel Indicators
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
On LX, EX, EX-L models
On Touring models
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
reminds you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
599 for more information on the
Maintenance MinderTM.
This indicator comes on when there
is a system message on the multiinformation display. Press the INFO
button on the steering wheel (see
page 83 ) to see the message (see
page 90 ).
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
Most of the time, this indicator
comes on along with other indicators
in the instrument panel such as the
seat belt reminder indicator, SRS
indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.
On all models except LX
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page 479 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
76
Security System Indicator
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:44:53 31TK8600_082
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY/
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
SELECT/RESET KNOB
U.S. Touring model is shown.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
77
Instruments and Controls
TACHOMETER
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper zone. If it reaches the red
(hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. Turn to page 667 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine cooling system.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
10/07/17 09:45:05 31TK8600_083
Gauges
Odometer
INFORMATION DISPLAY
: Press the select/reset knob.
RANGE
(ESTIMATED DISTANCE)
ODOMETER
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
INSTANT FUEL
ECONOMY
TRIP METER B
TRIP METER A
ENGINE
OIL LIFE
AVERAGE
FUEL
ECONOMY
U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.
Information Display
On LX, EX, EX-L models
The information display shows the
odometer, trip meter, engine oil life,
outside temperature (if equipped),
instant fuel economy, average fuel
economy, range (estimated distance),
and maintenance item code(s).
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, your last selection is
displayed.
On Touring models
For information about the multiinformation display,
see
page 83 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
78
2011 Odyssey
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
10/07/17 09:45:12 31TK8600_084
Gauges
Average Fuel Economy
Range (Estimated Distance)
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel economy since you last
reset that trip meter can be shown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel economy, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly.
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel economy for that trip
meter also resets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
79
Instruments and Controls
Instant Fuel Economy
This display shows the instant fuel
economy you are getting.
10/07/17 09:45:19 31TK8600_085
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
Except LX model
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Celsius (Canadian
models).
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
: Press and release the
select/reset knob.
To adjust the outside temperature
display, press and hold the select/
reset knob for 10 seconds. The
display changes as shown above.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
80
OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:45:25 31TK8600_086
Gauges
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the select/
reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
Battery Charge Low
When the battery’s state of charge is
low, the vehicle’s battery
management system triggers a
‘‘BATT LOW’’ message if the
ignition switch is on or off.
Depending on how low the battery’s
state of charge dropped and how
long it remained low, these
messages may occur frequently. It
may take a number of trips to
sufficiently recharge the battery and
the messages to no longer appear.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
IGN ON (II) − Immediately turn off
all electrical devices (interior lights,
air conditioning, audio, heated seats,
etc.). Try not to operate other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery. If
the message continues to display
while driving, see your dealer.
IGN ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
− Follow the message and turn off
all electrical devices. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery,
however the vehicle may not start. If
it does not start, see jump starting
(see page 665 ), or contact your
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
81
Instruments and Controls
Select the outside temperature
display by pressing and releasing the
select/reset knob. Press and hold
the same knob for a few seconds to
enter this setting, then turn it to
adjust the temperature. The
following sequence will appear for
each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2,
−1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2,
−1, 0 (Canada).
10/07/17 09:45:32 31TK8600_087
Gauges
Maintenance Minder TM
Check Fuel Cap Message
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 599 for
more information.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
82
2011 Odyssey
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 671 .
10/07/17 09:45:40 31TK8600_088
Multi-Information Display
On Touring models
There are two types of messages;
normal display messages and system
messages.
You can select the displayed
language and also customize some
vehicle control settings to your liking
with the multi-information display
and the three buttons on the steering
wheel.
Normal Display Messages
UPPER SEGMENT
LOWER SEGMENT
U.S. model is shown.
The multi-information display
consists of two segments: an upper
segment and a lower segment.
In the normal display mode, the
upper segment displays trip
computer information, such as fuel
economy or average speed. The
lower segment displays the
odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside
temperature, and engine oil life and
maintenanceInitem
f
or
mat
i
oncode(s).
Pr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INFO (▲/▼) BUTTON
SEL/RESET BUTTON
To change the display, press the
SEL/RESET button or INFO (▲/
▼) button on the steering wheel
repeatedly until the desired
information appears (see page 84 ).
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection is displayed.
CONTINUED
83
Instruments and Controls
The multi-information display in the
instrument panel displays various
information and messages when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position. Some of the messages help
you operate your vehicle more
comfortably. Others help to keep
you aware of the periodic
maintenance your vehicle needs for
continued trouble-free driving.
10/07/17 09:45:44 31TK8600_089
Multi-Information Display
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
U.S. model is shown.
84
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:45:52 31TK8600_090
Multi-Information Display
Odometer
Trip Meter
Canada
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0.’’
ODOMETER
TRIP METER A
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial/
territorial regulations to disconnect,
reset, or alter the odometer with the
intent to change the number of miles
or kilometers indicated.
TRIP METER B
In the customizing mode, you can set
Trip A and average fuel economy A
to reset at the same time when you
refuel your vehicle (see page 105 ).
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it. There
are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip
B. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
85
Instruments and Controls
When you reset Trip A, average fuel
economy A is reset at the same time.
When you reset Trip B, average fuel
economy B is reset.
10/07/17 09:46:01 31TK8600_091
Multi-Information Display
Outside Temperature
U.S.
Canada
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
This shows the outside Fahrenheit
temperature in U.S. models, and
Celsius temperature in Canadian
models.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. The temperature
reading can be affected by heat
reflection from the road surface,
engine heat, and the exhaust from
surrounding traffic. This can cause
an incorrect temperature reading
when your vehicle speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h). When you start
your trip, the sensor is not fully
acclimatized, therefore it may take
several minutes until the proper
temperature is displayed.
Engine Oil Life
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
This shows the remaining engine oil
life. It shows 100% after the engine
oil is replaced and the display is reset.
The engine oil life is calculated
based on engine operating conditions.
For more information, see page 599 .
You can adjust the outside
temperature display (see page 103 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
86
2011 Odyssey
ENGINE OIL LIFE
10/07/17 09:46:07 31TK8600_092
Multi-Information Display
Depending on how low the battery’s
state of charge dropped and how
long it remained low, these
messages may occur frequently. It
may take a number of trips to
sufficiently recharge the battery and
the messages to no longer appear.
IGN ON (II) − Immediately turn off
all electrical devices (interior lights,
air conditioning, audio, heated seats,
etc.). Try not to operate other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery. If
the message continues to display
while driving, see your dealer.
IGN ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
− Follow the message and turn off
all electrical devices. Driving the
vehicle will recharge the battery,
however the vehicle may not start. If
it does not start, see jump starting
(see page 665 ), or contact your
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
87
Instruments and Controls
Battery Charge Low
When the battery’s state of charge is
low, the vehicle’s battery
management system triggers one of
the following ‘‘BATTERY CHARGE
LOW’’ messages if the ignition
switch is on or off.
10/07/17 09:46:17 31TK8600_093
Multi-Information Display
Trip Computer
Along with the trip meter, the trip
computer calculates these values:
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Vehicle Speed
INSTANT FUEL MPG (U.S.
models)/INSTANT FUEL L/100 km
(Canadian models)
This shows your instant fuel
economy.
AVERAGE FUEL A/B
This shows your vehicle’s average
fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models)
or l/100 km (Canadian models) since
you last reset Trip A or Trip B.
You can customize the Trip A and
AVERAGE FUEL A reset condition
on the multi-information display (see
page 105 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
88
2011 Odyssey
RANGE
This shows the estimated distance
you can travel on the fuel remaining
in the fuel tank. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy
you received over the last several
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic, etc.
10/07/17 09:46:28 31TK8600_094
Multi-Information Display
ELAPSED TIME
You can customize the ELAPSED
TIME reset conditions on the multiinformation display (see page 107 ).
AVERAGE SPEED
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
To reset the AVERAGE SPEED you
have traveled, press and hold the
SEL/RESET button until the
number resets.
System Messages
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
The system message(s) triggers the
appropriate indicator(s) on the
instrument panel, including the
system message indicator, to come
on. The system message indicator
does not go off until the problem(s)
is corrected.
You will also hear a beep when the
system message comes on for the
first time.
If there is a problem with your
vehicle, for example the engine oil
level is low or a door is not fully
closed, the multi-information display
will show you the problem. It does
this by interrupting the current
display with one or more messages.
If there are several messages, each
message is displayed for about 5
seconds.
To switch the message(s) before 5
seconds elapsed or select the normal
display, press the INFO (▲/▼)
button on the steering wheel
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
89
Instruments and Controls
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, ELAPSED
TIME is reset.
If you want to reset the ELAPSED
TIME manually, go to the trip
computer’s ELAPSED TIME display,
and press and hold the SEL/RESET
button until the number resets.
10/07/17 09:46:40 31TK8600_095
Multi-Information Display
If the system message indicator
remains lit on the instrument panel,
you can see the corresponding
message(s) again by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button repeatedly.
See page
11
U.S.
Canada
See page
199
See page
20
Even if you switch the display from
the message to the normal display,
some important messages come on
again at regular intervals until the
problem is corrected.
See page
20
Here is a list of all messages:
U.S.
Canada
See page
672
See page
32
U.S.
U.S.
See page
33
Canada
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
90
2011 Odyssey
Canada
See page
672
10/07/17 09:46:52 31TK8600_096
Multi-Information Display
See page
670
See page
669
U.S.
Canada
See page
568
See page
649
See page
570
U.S.
Canada
See page
87
See page
575
See page
87
See page
576
See page
671
See page
667
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Instruments and Controls
See page
670
See page
162
See page
167
CONTINUED
91
10/07/17 09:47:04 31TK8600_097
Multi-Information Display
U.S.
Canada
See page
487
See page
543
See page
560
See page
147
See page
139
See page
561
See page
147
See page
490
See page
586
See page
74
See page
586
See page
74
See page
604
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
92
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:47:14 31TK8600_098
Multi-Information Display
Customized Settings
On Touring Models
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 96.
DRIVER’S ID
To enter the customizing mode,
press either INFO button (▲/▼)
repeatedly until ‘‘CUSTOMIZE
SETTINGS’’ is displayed, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
If you try to enter the customizing
mode while the vehicle is moving,
you will see a ‘‘MUST STOP AND
SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE
SETTINGS’’ message and you
cannot change the settings.
If you want to change any vehicle
control settings, select CHANGE
SETTINGS, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
Refer to the table on the next page
about the settings you can customize.
You can customize some vehicle
control settings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ and
‘‘DRIVER 2’’ separately. If ‘‘DRIVER
1’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,
customizing is not possible.
To have the driver’s ID detected,
make sure your remote transmitter
is linked to the system and the
driver’s door is unlocked with a
corresponding remote transmitter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
93
Instruments and Controls
You can customize some vehicle
control settings. To change the
settings, the ignition switch must be
in the ON (II) position, and the
vehicle must be stopped with the
transmission in Park.
10/07/17 09:47:19 31TK8600_099
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
METER SETUP
(P.100)
POSITION SETUP
(P.109)
LIGHTING
SETUP
(P.112)
* : Default setting
94
Menu Item
Description
LANGUAGE
SELECTION
Changes the language used in the display.
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
Changes the outside temperature reading above or
below its current reading.
TRIP A RESET WITH
REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME
RESET
Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy
to reset when you refuel.
Resets the elapsed time of your current trip.
MEMORY POSITION
LINK
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
Changes the driver’s seat and the outside mirror
positions to a stored setting.
Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights
stay on after you close the doors and the tailgate.
HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER
Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
Changes the timing of when the headlights come
on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Setting Option
ENGLISH*
FRENCH
SPANISH
−5°F∼±0°F*∼5°F (U.S.)
−3°C∼±0°C*∼3°C
(Canada)
ON
OFF*
IGN OFF*
TRIP A RESET
TRIP B RESET
ON*
OFF
15 sec
30 sec*
60 sec
0 sec
15 sec*
30 sec
60 sec
LOW
MAX
MIN
HIGH
MID*
Page
101
103
105
107
110
113
115
117
10/07/17 09:47:14 31TK8600_098
Multi-Information Display
Group Setup
DOOR SETUP
(P.119)
Menu Item
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Changes the setting of when to automatically
unlock the driver’s/all the doors.
KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE
PSD KEYLESS OPEN
MODE
PTG KEYLESS OPEN
MODE*2
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Changes which doors unlock with the remote
transmitter on a first push.
Changes the power sliding door opening setting.
Changes the power tailgate opening setting.
The exterior lights flash each time you press the
LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also
sound when you press the LOCK button twice.
Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the
doors to relock and the security system to set after
you unlock but do not open the door.
Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.
Setting Option
Page
SHIFT FROM P
WITH VEH SPEED*1
OFF
DRIVER DOOR*1/
SHIFT TO P*1
ALL DOORS
IGN OFF
OFF
DRIVER DOOR *1
ALL DOORS
ANY TIME*1
WHEN UNLOCKED
ANY TIME*1
WHEN UNLOCKED
ON*1
OFF
120
90 sec
60 sec
30 sec*1
SET
CANCEL
132
122
Instruments and Controls
Changes the setting of when to automatically lock
the doors.
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
DEFAULT ALL
(P.96)
Description
AUTO DOOR LOCK
124
126
128
130
96
*1 : Default setting
*2 : U.S. models only
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
95
10/07/17 09:47:31 31TK8600_101
Multi-Information Display
DEFAULT ALL
If you want to set the default settings,
press the INFO (▲/▼) button to
select DEFAULT ALL, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
To set the default settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select SET
then press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
96
2011 Odyssey
When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will
see the above display for several
seconds, then the screen returns to
the default all setting display.
10/07/17 09:47:36 31TK8600_102
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
If the setting is not successfully
completed, ‘‘FAILED’’ is shown for
several seconds, and then the screen
goes back to the normal message
mode. Repeat the same procedure to
select DEFAULT ALL.
If you want to cancel DEFAULT
ALL, select CANCEL, then press the
SEL/RESET button. The screen
goes back to the previous display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
97
10/07/17 09:47:44 31TK8600_103
Multi-Information Display
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown on the next page. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setup you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Customize Settings
You can customize some of the
vehicle control settings to your
preference. Here are the settings
you can customize:
METER SETUP
POSITION SETUP
LIGHTING SETUP
DOOR SETUP
If you do not make any changes,
select ‘‘EXIT.’’ The display returns to
the normal display.
When you want to change the
vehicle control settings, press the
INFO (▲/▼) button to select
CHANGE SETTINGS, then press
the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
98
2011 Odyssey
If you want the settings as they were
when the vehicle left the factory,
select DEFAULT ALL, as described
on page 96 .
10/07/17 09:47:48 31TK8600_104
Multi-Information Display
METER SETUP
(See page 100.)
Instruments and Controls
POSITION SETUP
(See page 109.)
LIGHTING SETUP
(See page 112.)
DOOR SETUP
(See page 119.)
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
99
10/07/17 09:47:55 31TK8600_105
Multi-Information Display
Meter Setup
Here are the four custom settings
for the meter setup:
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.
DISPLAY
TRIP A RESET WITH REFUEL
ELAPSED TIME RESET
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
100
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:48:02 31TK8600_106
Multi-Information Display
Language Selection
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
101
Instruments and Controls
There are three selectable
languages: English, French, and
Spanish. To choose the language you
want, follow these instructions:
10/07/17 09:48:08 31TK8600_107
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see ‘‘SETTING
INCOMPLETE’’ on the display, then
the display goes back to the previous
display. Repeat the setup.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
102
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
10/07/17 09:48:15 31TK8600_108
Multi-Information Display
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
U.S. model is shown.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Adjust the outside temperature value
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET
button to set the desired value.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
103
Instruments and Controls
If you sometimes find that the
temperature reading is a few
degrees above or below the actual
temperature, you can adjust it by
following these instructions:
10/07/17 09:48:21 31TK8600_109
Multi-Information Display
U.S. model is shown.
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see ‘‘SETTING
INCOMPLETE’’ on the display, then
the display goes back to the previous
display. Repeat the setup.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
104
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
10/07/17 09:48:28 31TK8600_110
Multi-Information Display
Trip A Reset with Refuel
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
CONTINUED
105
Instruments and Controls
To cause Trip A and average fuel for
trip A to reset every time you refuel
your vehicle, follow these
instructions:
10/07/17 09:48:32 31TK8600_111
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘TRIP
A RESET with REFUEL’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
106
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:48:41 31TK8600_112
Multi-Information Display
Elapsed Time Reset
There are three elapsed time reset
choices you can make:
TRIP A − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip A is reset.
TRIP B − The elapsed time is reset
when Trip B is reset.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘METER SETUP’’
by pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
107
Instruments and Controls
IGN OFF − The elapsed time is
reset when you turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position.
10/07/17 09:48:46 31TK8600_113
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘ELAPSED TIME RESET’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
108
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
10/07/17 09:48:52 31TK8600_114
Multi-Information Display
Position Setup
You can customize the MEMORY
POSITION LINK setting in position
setup.
Instruments and Controls
While ‘‘POSITION SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
109
10/07/17 09:49:00 31TK8600_115
Multi-Information Display
Memory Position Link
Memory Position Setup
If ‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ is
‘‘ON,’’ the driver’s seat and outside
mirrors move to the positions stored
in the memory when you open the
driver’s door, using the remote
transmitter.
Refer to page 190 to set the driving
position memory. Also refer to page
150 for remote transmitter use.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘POSITION
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
110
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
10/07/17 09:49:05 31TK8600_116
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘MEMORY POSITION LINK’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
111
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:49:12 31TK8600_117
Multi-Information Display
Lighting Setup
Here are the three custom settings
for the lighting setup:
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
While ‘‘LIGHTING SETUP’’ is
shown, press the SEL/RESET
button to enter the customize mode.
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
112
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:49:20 31TK8600_118
Multi-Information Display
Interior Light Dimming Time
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (15 sec, 30
sec, or 60 sec) by pressing the INFO
(▲/▼) button, then enter your
selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
CONTINUED
113
Instruments and Controls
The interior lights fade out when you
close all doors and tailgate. To
change how long the lights stay on
before they fade out, follow these
instructions:
10/07/17 09:49:24 31TK8600_119
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING
TIME’’ and repeat the procedure
again.
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
114
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:49:31 31TK8600_120
Multi-Information Display
Headlight Auto Off Timer
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (60 sec, 30
sec, 15 sec or 0 sec) by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
CONTINUED
115
Instruments and Controls
The headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights, and license
plate lights go off after the selected
time when you remove the key from
the ignition switch and close the
driver’s door. To change how long
the lights stay on before they go off,
follow these instructions:
10/07/17 09:49:36 31TK8600_121
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’
and repeat the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
116
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
10/07/17 09:49:45 31TK8600_122
Multi-Information Display
Auto Light Sensitivity
MAX −
The headlights come on when it is
bright.
HIGH −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat bright.
MID −
The headlights come on when it is as
bright as sunset or sunrise.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘LIGHTING
SETUP’’ by pressing the INFO (▲/
▼) button repeatedly.
LOW −
The headlights come on when it is
somewhat dark.
MIN −
The headlights come on when it is
dark.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting (MAX,
HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
CONTINUED
117
Instruments and Controls
The headlights automatically come
on when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position and the ambient
light reaches a changeable level. You
can select the auto light sensitivity
from the following five levels:
10/07/17 09:49:50 31TK8600_123
Multi-Information Display
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
LIGHT SENSITIVITY’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
118
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
10/07/17 09:50:00 31TK8600_124
Multi-Information Display
Instruments and Controls
Door Setup
Here are the seven custom settings
for the door setup:
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK
MODE
PSD (POWER SLIDING DOORS)
KEYLESS OPEN MODE
PTG (POWER TAILGATE)
KEYLESS OPEN MODE
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
While ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ is shown,
press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the customize mode.
U.S. models only
: Press the INFO (▲/▼) button.
: Press the SEL/RESET button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
119
10/07/17 09:50:08 31TK8600_125
Multi-Information Display
Each time you press the INFO (▲/
▼) button, the screen changes as
shown in the illustration. Press the
INFO (▲/▼) button, until you see
the setting you want to customize,
then press the SEL/RESET button
to enter your selection.
Auto Door Lock
There are three settings you can
choose from:
OFF −
The auto door lock mode is
deactivated all the time.
WITH VEH SPD −
The doors lock when the vehicle
speed reaches about 10 mph (about
15 km/h).
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
SHIFT FROM P −
The doors lock whenever you move
the shift lever out of Park.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
120
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:50:14 31TK8600_126
Multi-Information Display
If you fail to enter your selection,
you will see the above display for
several seconds, and the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
Repeat the setup.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit ‘‘AUTO DOOR LOCK,’’
press the INFO button until you see
‘‘EXIT,’’ then press the SEL/RESET
button.
CONTINUED
121
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is entered, you
will see the above display for several
seconds, and then the display goes
back to ‘‘CUSTOMIZE MENU.’’
10/07/17 09:50:23 31TK8600_127
Multi-Information Display
Auto Door Unlock
There are five possible settings:
OFF − The auto door unlock is
deactivated all the time.
DRIVER DOOR With SHIFT to P −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
move the shift lever to Park with the
brake pedal depressed.
ALL DOORS With SHIFT to P − All
the doors unlock when you move the
shift lever to Park with the brake
pedal depressed.
DRIVER DOOR With IGN OFF −
The driver’s door unlocks when you
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
(0) position.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
ALL DOORS With IGN OFF − All
the doors unlock when you turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK (0)
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
122
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:50:29 31TK8600_128
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘AUTO
DOOR UNLOCK’’ and repeat the
procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
CONTINUED
123
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:50:35 31TK8600_129
Multi-Information Display
Key and Remote Unlock Mode
To select whether the driver’s door
unlocks or all the doors and the
tailgate unlock when you push the
UNLOCK button on the remote
transmitter or use the key on the
driver’s door lock, follow these
instructions.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
124
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to
enter the selecting mode.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:50:41 31TK8600_130
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘KEY
AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE’’
and repeat the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
CONTINUED
125
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:50:48 31TK8600_131
Multi-Information Display
PSD (Power Sliding Doors) Keyless
Open Mode
You can customize the power sliding
doors setting so that the power
sliding doors can’t be opened without
unlocking them first from the
outside.
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The sliding door
unlocks and opens when you press
and hold the sliding door button on
the remote transmitter for 1 second.
The front door on the same side also
unlocks at the same time.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the sliding door
before opening it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
126
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:50:54 31TK8600_132
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘PSD
KEYLESS OPEN MODE’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
CONTINUED
127
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:51:04 31TK8600_133
Multi-Information Display
PTG (Power Tailgate) Keyless Open
Mode
U.S. models only
You can customize the power
tailgate setting not to open without
unlocking the tailgate lock first by
remote transmitter from the outside.
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The tailgate unlocks
and opens when you press and hold
the tailgate button on the remote
transmitter for 1 second. The
tailgate will automatically relock
when you close it when the doors are
locked.
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the tailgate before
opening it. In addition, the tailgate
will not automatically relock when
you close it.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
On Canadian models
See page 165 for how to customize
the power tailgate keyless open
mode.
128
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button to see
the selections.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:51:10 31TK8600_134
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to ‘‘PTG
KEYLESS OPEN MODE’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
CONTINUED
129
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:51:16 31TK8600_135
Multi-Information Display
Keyless Lock Acknowledgment
When you push the LOCK button on
the remote transmitter, some
exterior lights flash, and a beeper
sounds when you push the LOCK
button again within 5 seconds to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
has set (see page 479 ). You can
customize the exterior lights not to
flash and the beeper not to sound.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
130
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button. The
display changes as shown above.
Select ON or OFF by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then enter
your selection by pressing the SEL/
RESET button.
10/07/17 09:51:23 31TK8600_136
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ and repeat
the procedure again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
CONTINUED
131
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/17 09:51:29 31TK8600_137
Multi-Information Display
Security Relock Timer
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any of the doors or
the tailgate within 30 seconds, the
doors and the tailgate automatically
relock and the security system sets.
You can change this relock time
from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.
You can choose this item to
customize from ‘‘DOOR SETUP’’ by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button
repeatedly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
132
2011 Odyssey
Press the SEL/RESET button, then
press the INFO button.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the INFO (▲/▼) button,
then enter your selection by pressing
the SEL/RESET button.
10/07/17 09:51:35 31TK8600_138
Multi-Information Display
If the ‘‘SETTING INCOMPLETE’’
message appears, go back to
‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’ and
repeat the procedure again.
To exit this mode without changing
the settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’ by
pressing the INFO button, then
press the SEL/RESET button. The
display goes back to the customize
item screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
133
Instruments and Controls
When your selection is successfully
completed, the display changes as
shown above, and then goes back to
the customize item screen.
10/07/19 15:50:55 31TK8600_139
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS*2
(P.136)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS*2
(P.411)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.480)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.135)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) OFF SWITCH
(P.571)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.33)
BLIND SPOT
INFORMATION SYSTEM
(BSI) OFF SWITCH*2
(P.585)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES*2
(P.189)
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES*2
(P.169)
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.234)
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM*2
(P.414, 442)
POWER TAILGATE
SWITCH*2
(P.163)
PARKING SENSOR
SYSTEM SWITCH*2
(P.486)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
(P.412)
HORN*1
VOICE CONTROL
BUTTONS*2
(P.496, 517)
BLUETOOTH
STEERING WHEEL
HANDSFREELINK
ADJUSTMENTS
*2
BUTTONS (P.496, 517) (P.143)
MULTI-INFORMATION
BUTTONS*2
(P.83)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
*1 : To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering
wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
o
vi
dedby:
*2 : If equipped
134
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.142)
2011 Odyssey
COOL BOX SWITCH*2
(P.209)
10/07/17 09:51:52 31TK8600_140
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
ADJUSTMENT RING
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
135
Instruments and Controls
INT − The length of the wipe
interval is varied automatically
according to vehicle’s speed.
Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
10/07/17 09:52:04 31TK8600_141
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
4 Rotate the switch
counterclockwise also to spray the
window washer and turn the wiper
on.
Turn Signal and Headlights
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
When the wiper control lever is
positioned as follows:
1. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
136
INT − The rear window wiper
operates intermittently.
LO or HI − The rear window wiper
operates continuously.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
1. Turn signal
2. Off
3. Parking and indicator lights
4. AUTO*
5. Headlights on
6. High beams
7. Flash high beams
8. Fog lights off *
9. Fog lights on*
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:52:10 31TK8600_142
Turn Signal and Headlights
Headlights On − Turning the
switch to the ‘‘
’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights.
High Beams − To switch from low
beams to high beams, push the left
lever forward until you hear a click.
The high beam indicator will come
on (see page 73 ). Pull it back to
return to low beams. To flash the
high beams, pull the lever back
lightly, then release it. The high
beams will stay on as long as you
hold the lever back.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
137
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
10/07/17 09:52:17 31TK8600_143
Headlights
On all models except LX
AUTO − The automatic lighting
feature turns on the headlights, all
other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights when it
senses low ambient light.
To turn on the automatic lighting,
turn the light switch to the AUTO
position. The lights will come on
automatically when the outside light
level becomes low (at dusk, for
example). The lights on indicator
comes on as a reminder. The lights
and indicator turn off automatically
when the system senses high
ambient light.
Even with the automatic lighting
feature turned on, we recommend
that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night or in a dense
fog, or when you enter dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking
facilities.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page 117.
The automatic lighting feature is
controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
sensor or spill liquids on it.
The lights turn off automatically
when you turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK (0) position. To turn them
on again, either turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, or
turn the light switch to the
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
138
LIGHT SENSOR
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:52:25 31TK8600_144
Headlights
Fog Lights
On Touring models
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch off, the
daytime running lights come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position and release the
parking brake. They remain on until
you turn the ignition switch off, even
if you set the parking brake.
When the headlights are on, the
daytime running lights are off.
On Touring models
If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRL
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display, there is a
problem with the daytime running
light system. Take your vehicle to a
dealer to have it checked.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
When the multi-information display
shows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, the
daytime running lights are off.
Follow the procedure in the left
column to turn them on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
139
Instruments and Controls
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
With the light switch in the AUTO
position, you can also use the fog
lights when the headlights turn on
automatically. They will go off when
the headlights turn off, or the
daytime running lights are on.
10/07/17 09:52:33 31TK8600_145
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
This feature turns off the headlights,
all other exterior lights, and the
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds after you remove the key
and close the driver’s door.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position with the
headlight switch on, but do not open
the door, the lights turn off after 10
minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is
in the ‘‘AUTO’’ position).
On Touring models
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights on
reminder chime.
To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO
OFF TIMER’’ setting, see page 115 .
The automatic lighting off feature
activates if you leave the headlight
switch in the ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’
position or if the lights are turned on
by setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’
position (if equipped), and you
remove the key, then open and close
the driver’s door.
SELECT/RESET KNOB
You can change the instrument panel
brightness only when the light
switch is on.
Turn the knob on the lower part of
the instrument panel to adjust the
brightness.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
140
Instrument Panel Brightness
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:52:40 31TK8600_146
Instrument Panel Brightness
Except Touring model is shown.
Touring model is shown.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
The level of brightness is shown on
the display while you adjust it. It
goes out 5 seconds after you finish
adjusting.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
You will also hear a beep when the
maximum level is canceled by
turning the knob a click to the left.
BRIGHTNESS LEVEL
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. Turning the select/
reset knob to the right until you hear
a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
141
Instruments and Controls
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
10/07/17 09:52:49 31TK8600_147
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button
Rear Window Defogger
have to turn it on again when you
restart the vehicle.
On LX models
Except U.S.
LX model
U.S. LX
model
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all outside turn signals and
both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
142
The rear window defogger clears fog,
frost, and thin ice from the window.
Push the defogger button to turn it
on and off. Pushing this button also
turns the mirror heaters on and off.
The indicator in the button comes on
to show the defogger is on. If you do
not turn it off, the defogger will shut
itself off after 10 to 30 minutes
(depending on the ambient
temperature). It also shuts off when
you turn off the
ignition
switch. You
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The defogger will shut itself off
within about 20 minutes.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
If equipped
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 199 .
10/07/17 09:52:56 31TK8600_148
Steering Wheel Adjustments
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
Make any steering wheel
adjustments before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
LEVER
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
143
Instruments and Controls
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
10/07/17 09:53:02 31TK8600_149
Keys and Locks
LX models
KEY
MASTER KEYS VALET KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (Gray)
TAG
TRANSMITTER
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
EX models
VALET KEY MASTER KEYS
KEY
NUMBER (Gray)
WITH REMOTE
TAG
TRANSMITTER
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
144
2011 Odyssey
EX-L and Touring models
KEY
VALET KEY MASTER KEYS
NUMBER (Gray)
WITH REMOTE
TAG
TRANSMITTER
10/07/17 09:53:10 31TK8600_150
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
145
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
10/07/17 09:53:16 31TK8600_151
Immobilizer System
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
chain) is near the ignition switch
when you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
146
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:53:25 31TK8600_152
Ignition Switch
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key to the LOCK (0)
position, the shift lever must be in
Park, and you must push the key in
slightly.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
If you turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) position with the
driver’s door closed, you will see an
‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’
message on the multi-information
display to inform you of the key
position.
You will also see a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’
message on the multi-information
display.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
On Touring models
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
147
Instruments and Controls
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
10/07/17 09:53:34 31TK8600_153
Remote Transmitter
On LX models
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once. When you push
LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you
will hear a horn to verify that the
doors are locked. You cannot lock
the doors if any door is not fully
closed or the key is in the ignition
switch.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
will flash twice each time you press
the button.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page 213 ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
the doors and the tailgate with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, the doors
and the tailgate automatically relock.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
148
2011 Odyssey
PANIC − Press this button for
about 1 second to attract attention;
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
10/07/17 09:53:44 31TK8600_154
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
BATTERY
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
SCREW
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
TAB
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
149
Instruments and Controls
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
10/07/17 09:53:52 31TK8600_155
Remote Transmitter
On EX, EX-L, Touring models
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
Touring model is shown.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, see
page 130 .
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set. You cannot lock the doors and
the tailgate if any door or the tailgate
is not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Press it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.
If you do not open any doors or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock and the security
system sets.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see
page 124 .
To change the ‘‘SECURITY
RELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see
page 132 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
150
2011 Odyssey
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page 213 ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 30
seconds, then go out. If you relock
the doors and the tailgate with the
remote transmitter before 30
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 1 second to attract attention;
the horn will sound and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
10/07/17 09:54:01 31TK8600_156
Remote Transmitter
Opening or Closing the Power Sliding
Doors
DRIVER’S SIDE SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
Opening or Closing the Power
Tailgate
On EX-L and Touring models
MAIN SWITCH
Instruments and Controls
LED
TAILGATE
BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR BUTTON
Touring model is shown.
Press and hold the right button for
about 1 second to open or close the
passenger’s side door, and the left
button to open or close the driver’s
side door.
POWER SLIDING DOOR SWITCHES
If the power sliding door MAIN
switch on the dashboard is in the
OFF position, you cannot open or
close the sliding doors with the
remote transmitter.
You can customize the power sliding
doors keyless unlock mode setting
(see page 126 or 171 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
You can open or close the power
tailgate with the remote transmitter.
Press and hold the TAILGATE
button to open or close the power
tailgate. When the tailgate begins to
move, you will hear a beep, and some
front and rear lights will flash.
CONTINUED
151
10/07/17 09:54:09 31TK8600_157
Remote Transmitter
You can customize the power
tailgate keyless unlock mode setting
(see page 128 or 165 ).
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
On Touring models
With Driver 1
With Driver 2
Here are the settings activated with
the remote:
Customized settings
(see page 93 ).
Driving position memory
(see page 190 ).
When you unlock the door with your
remote, each remote activates the
keyless memory settings related to
that remote. The driver’s ID (Driver
1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back
of each remote.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
152
2011 Odyssey
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, the driver’s seat (except
the power lumbar feature) and
outside mirrors start to move to the
positions stored in memory. The
indicator in the related memory
button to the remote comes on.
10/07/17 09:54:20 31TK8600_158
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
TAB
BATTERY
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
SCREW
To replace the battery:
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
NOTE: Be careful when removing
this screw as the head of the screw
can strip out.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail. InformationProvidedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
153
Instruments and Controls
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
10/07/17 09:54:26 31TK8600_159
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
154
2011 Odyssey
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
10/07/17 09:54:34 31TK8600_160
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
Lock
Unlock
Front
LOCK TAB
Rear
LOCK TAB
RED INDICATOR
Unlock
Lock
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all doors and the tailgate,
push the front of the master door
lock switch on either front door, pull
the lock tab rearward on the driver’s
door, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
Lock
RED INDICATOR
The lock tab on any door locks and
unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
next to the inner door handle.
Pressing the rear of the master door
lock switch will unlock all doors and
the tailgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
155
Instruments and Controls
Unlock
10/07/17 09:54:43 31TK8600_161
Door Locks
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the front
of the master switch, then close
the door.
On Touring models
Lockout Prevention
To change the ‘‘KEY AND REMOTE
UNLOCK MODE’’ setting, see
page 124 .
With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. They are not disabled if all
the doors and the tailgate are closed.
If you try to lock an open driver’s
door by pulling the lock tab rearward
the lock tab on the driver’s door
pops out.
You can open or close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) by
using the key in the driver’s door
(see page 194 ).
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
On LX, EX, EX-L models
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and the
parking brake is applied. Make all
settings before you start driving.
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
LOCK’’ setting, see page 120 .
To change the ‘‘AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK’’ setting, see page 122 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
156
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:54:52 31TK8600_162
Door Locks
Auto Door Locking
On LX, EX, EX-L models
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
The doors and tailgate lock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park (P) position.
The doors and tailgate lock when
the vehicle speed reaches 10 mph
(15 km/h).
This is the default setting.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
157
Instruments and Controls
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
10/07/17 09:55:01 31TK8600_163
Door Locks
To program the Park Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
position.
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph
(15 km/h).
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
158
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:55:13 31TK8600_164
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
On LX, EX models
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position with the brake
pedal depressed.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
Instruments and Controls
4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
Auto Door Unlocking
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
CONTINUED
159
10/07/17 09:55:22 31TK8600_165
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the shift lever is
moved into the Park (P) position with
the brake pedal depressed.
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
feature.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
4. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
160
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:55:31 31TK8600_166
Door Locks
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the ignition switch is
moved out of the ON (II) position.
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
the Park (P) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Even if your vehicle’s battery is
removed or goes dead, the system
keeps the auto door lock/unlock
setting which you selected.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
161
Instruments and Controls
4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold the switch:
5. Release the switch, and within 20
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
10/07/17 09:55:39 31TK8600_167
Door Locks, Tailgate
Childproof Door Locks
Unlock
On all models except LX
With the childproof door locks on,
automatic operation with the inside
door handle or the power sliding
door switch on the door pillar is
disabled.
Tailgate
RELEASE
Lock
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear sliding doors. Each door has
a lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle.
To open the tailgate, push the
release, and lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the tailgate handle to
lower it, then press down on the
back edge.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
162
2011 Odyssey
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58 .
10/07/19 15:51:06 31TK8600_168
Tailgate
Power Tailgate
U.S. EX-L model
On EX-L and Touring models
The tailgate can be opened and
closed with the dashboard switch or
the remote transmitter.
Dashboard Switch
Press and hold the dashboard switch
for about 1 second to open or close
the tailgate.
Each time you press the button on
the remote transmitter or the
dashboard switch, you will hear a
beep, and some front and rear lights
will flash.
If you push the same button or
switch again while the tailgate is
opening or closing, you will hear
three beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened or closed position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
TAILGATE BUTTON
The tailgate can also be closed by
pressing the button on the tailgate. If
you press the button again while the
tailgate is closing, you will hear three
beeps, and the tailgate will stop
moving, reverse direction, and stop
at the fully opened position.
To open or close the tailgate
manually, see page 162 .
CONTINUED
163
Instruments and Controls
POWER TAILGATE SWITCH
Canadian EX-L, Touring models
Remote Transmitter
Press and hold the tailgate button on
the remote transmitter for about 1
second to unlock and open the
tailgate simultaneously. Press and
hold the button again to close it. If
the doors are kept closed, the
tailgate will be automatically
relocked when it is closed.
You can customize the power
tailgate keyless unlock mode setting
(see page 128 or 165 ).
10/07/17 09:55:59 31TK8600_169
Tailgate
Auto-Reverse
The power tailgate has an autoreverse feature. If it meets
resistance while opening or closing,
it will beep three times and reverse
direction. However, the tailgate may
not reverse immediately. Always
make sure passengers and objects
are clear of the tailgate before
opening or closing it.
Closing a power tailgate while
anyone is in the path of the
tailgate can cause serious
injury.
Make sure everyone is clear
before closing the power
tailgate.
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the tailgate or
on the tailgate sill. The auto reverse
feature stops working when the
tailgate is about to latch so the motor
can pull the tailgate shut.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, goes dead, or the fuse
is removed while the tailgate is fully
open, the power tailgate needs to be
reset. After connecting the battery
or installing the fuse, close the
tailgate fully by hand.
The power tailgate may not open or
close under the these conditions:
The vehicle is parked on a steep
hill.
When the vehicle is swayed in a
strong wind.
When the tailgate or the roof is
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onPr
ovi
de
dby:
covered with
snow
or
ice.
164
2011 Odyssey
Do not install any accessories on the
tailgate. It may cause the tailgate to
malfunction. If there is snow or ice
on the tailgate, make sure to remove
it before you operate the tailgate.
If you push the tailgate release
button inside the handle while the
tailgate is opening or closing, the
power tailgate function shuts OFF.
You need to open or close it the rest
of the way manually.
The tailgate has sensors on both
sides. Be careful not to damage them.
If the sensors are damaged, the
power tailgate does not function
properly.
10/07/19 15:51:16 31TK8600_170
Tailgate
If you try to drive off with the
tailgate open, a beeper sounds and a
‘‘DOOR & TAILGATE OPEN’’
message is shown on the multiinformation display.
If there is a problem in the power
tailgate system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK POWER TAILGATE’’
message on the multi-information
display. Have the system checked by
your dealer.
With this message shown on the
multi-information display, you can
still open or close the tailgate
manually.
You can customize the power
tailgate setting not to open without
unlocking the tailgate lock first by
remote transmitter from the outside.
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the tailgate before
opening it. In addition, the tailgate
will not automatically relock when
you close it.
U.S. EX-L model is shown.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the parking brake is applied,
all doors and the tailgate are fully
closed and locked, and the key is
removed from the ignition switch.
LED
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The tailgate unlocks
and opens when you press and hold
the tailgate button on the remote
transmitter for 1 second. The
tailgate will automatically relock
when you close it when the doors are
locked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
You can switch between these two
modes as following:
1. Press and hold the power tailgate
switch on the dashboard.
CONTINUED
165
Instruments and Controls
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
58 .
To Customize the Power Tailgate
Setting
10/07/17 09:56:18 31TK8600_171
Tailgate
2. Keep pressing the dashboard
switch, press and hold the power
tailgate button on the remote
transmitter until the LED on the
remote flashes (for 1 second).
Unlocking the Tailgate
3. Release the dashboard switch.
4. Follow steps 1 through 3 within 20
seconds and repeat it four times.
To go back to the other setting,
repeat the above procedure.
When the ‘‘WHEN UNLOCKED’’
mode is set, you will hear 3 short
beeps.
When the ‘‘ANYTIME’’ mode is
set, you will hear a long beep.
COVER
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Place a cloth on the upper edge of
the cover to prevent scratches, then
use a small flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the cover on the back of the
tailgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
166
2011 Odyssey
On LX and EX models
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
10/07/17 09:56:28 31TK8600_172
Tailgate, Sliding Doors
Opening and Closing Manual
Sliding Doors
Power Sliding Doors
On LX models
The doors are electrically powered
and can be operated with the remote
transmitter, the door handles, the
dashboard switches or both door
pillar switches. To operate the doors:
LEVER
On EX-L and Touring models
Push the release lever to the right as
shown.
To close, pull either handle, and slide
the door closed. Make sure the door
is closed and latched securely before
driving, and all passengers are clear
of the sliding doors before closing
them.
When opening a sliding door, it stops
about halfway if the window is open
more than about 3 in (8 cm). If the
vehicle is facing downhill, the sliding
door will slam shut when you release
the door handle. Always close the
window fully before opening the
sliding door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position with the brake
pedal pressed or the parking brake
applied when you operate the
doors with the shift lever in any
position other than Park.
The power sliding door MAIN
switch must be in the ON position.
To open the door with the inside
handle or the door pillar switch,
the childproof door lock on the
door must be unlocked (see page
162 ).
CONTINUED
167
Instruments and Controls
To open, pull the inside or outside
door handle, and slide the door back.
It will latch in the fully open position.
When opening from the inside, the
childproof door lock must be
unlocked.
On all models except LX
10/07/17 09:56:36 31TK8600_173
Sliding Doors
When the shift lever is in Park:
If you shift out of Park while a door
is closing and you have neither
pressed the brake pedal nor applied
the parking brake, you will hear a
beep until the door closes.
When you shift out of Park while a
door is opening, you will hear a
continuous tone and the door will
stop moving if you release the brake
pedal or the parking brake. Stop the
vehicle and close the door.
When the shift lever is in any position
except Park and the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position:
If you release the brake pedal or the
parking brake when you try to open
the sliding door, you will hear a beep
and the door will be left ajar.
To open the door fully, shift to Park,
press the brake, or apply the parking
brake.
If you release the brake pedal or the
parking brake when you try to close
the sliding door, you will hear a beep
until the door closes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
168
2011 Odyssey
Door Handles
To open the door with the inside
door handle, tilt the handle
backward. Tilt it forward to close the
door. If you tilt the handle in either
direction while the door is opening
or closing, the door stops moving.
Then tilt the handle in the
appropriate direction to open or
close the door fully.
To open or close the door with the
outside door handle, pull the door
handle. If you pull the door handle
while a door is opening or closing,
the door stops moving. If you pull the
door handle again, the door will
open fully.
10/07/17 09:56:44 31TK8600_174
Sliding Doors
POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
To close a sliding door, push and
release the top of the switch.
POWER SLIDING DOOR
DASHBOARD SWITCHES
The dashboard switches on the left
of the steering column allow you to
open or close the power sliding doors.
POWER SLIDING DOOR
DOOR PILLAR SWITCH
The door pillar switches for the rear
passengers are located on the door
pillar trim panel in front of the power
sliding door on both sides.
The MAIN switch on the dashboard
controls power to the sliding doors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To stop a door, push either the top or
bottom of the switch. The door will
stop and you will hear three beeps.
Push the switch again to resume
movement.
When the MAIN switch is in the
OFF position, you have to operate
the doors manually.
CONTINUED
169
Instruments and Controls
To open a power sliding door, push
and release the bottom of the
appropriate switch. If you forget to
unlock the door, you may hear three
beeps. Unlock the door, and try
again.
Switches
10/07/17 09:56:53 31TK8600_175
Sliding Doors
Remote Transmitter
DRIVER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR
BUTTON
LED
PASSENGER’S SIDE
SLIDING DOOR BUTTON
You can customize the power sliding
doors keyless unlock mode setting
(see page 126 or 171 ).
To close a sliding door, press the
power sliding door button for at least
1 second.
To stop movement, push the
appropriate door button; you will
hear three beeps. Push and hold the
same button again for at least 1
second and the door will reverse
direction.
Press and hold the appropriate
button on the remote transmitter for
about 1 second to unlock and open
the sliding door simultaneously. The
front door on the same side will also
unlock. Press and hold the button
again to close the sliding door. The
sliding door and the front door on
the same side will remain unlocked
even after closing the sliding door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
170
2011 Odyssey
Auto-Reverse
Each power sliding door has an autoreverse feature. If a door meets
resistance while closing, it will beep
three times and reverse direction.
However, the door may not reverse
immediately and may cause some
bruising or discomfort. Always make
sure passengers and objects are
clear of the doors before closing
them.
If a rear window is open more than
about 3 in (8 cm), the power sliding
door is designed to stop about
halfway to avoid accidents. If this
happens, close the door with the
door handles, the dashboard switch,
door pillar switch, or the remote
transmitter. Close the window and
open the sliding door. Make sure the
window is fully closed before you
operate the power sliding door.
10/07/17 09:57:05 31TK8600_176
Sliding Doors
To Customize the Power Sliding
Doors Setting
MAIN SWITCH DRIVER’S SIDE
DASHBOARD SWITCH
DRIVER’S SIDE
POWER SLIDING
DOOR BUTTON
You can customize the power sliding
doors button on the remote
transmitter to not open the sliding
doors without unlocking the sliding
doors lock first.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the parking brake is applied,
all doors are fully closed and locked,
the key is removed from the ignition
There are two settings you can
choose from:
ANYTIME − The sliding door
unlocks and opens when you press
and hold the sliding door button on
the remote transmitter for 1 second.
The front door on the same side also
unlocks at the same time.
WHEN UNLOCKED − In this mode,
you must unlock the sliding door
before opening it.
You can switch between these two
modes as following:
2. Keep pressing the dashboard
switch, press and hold the driver’s
side power sliding door button on
the remote transmitter until the
LED on the remote flashes (for 1
second).
3. Release the dashboard switch.
4. Follow steps 1 through 3 within 20
seconds and repeat it four times.
To go back to the other setting,
repeat the above procedure.
When the ‘‘WHEN UNLOCKED’’
mode is set, you will hear 3 short
beeps.
When the ‘‘ANYTIME’’ mode is
set, you will hear a long beep.
1. Press and hold the driver’s side
sliding door dashboard CLOSE
switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
171
Instruments and Controls
LED
switch, and the power sliding door
MAIN switch is set to the OFF
position.
10/07/17 09:57:14 31TK8600_177
Sliding Doors
Manually Opening/Closing the
Power Sliding Door
You can manually open or close the
sliding doors. The MAIN switch
must be in the OFF position. To
open a door, pull the inside or
outside door handle, and slide the
door back. It will latch in the fully
open position. To close, pull either
handle and slide the door forward.
When the door is almost closed, the
auto-closer will pull the door shut.
Important Sliding Door
Precautions
On all models except LX
Before operating the sliding doors,
check that passengers, especially
children, do not have their hands on
the edge of the sliding door or on the
door pillar. The auto-reverse motor
stops working when the door is
about to latch so the auto-closer can
pull the door shut.
If there is an obstacle in the door sill,
the power sliding door may not open
or close properly. When removing
the obstacle from the door sill, make
sure to turn off the MAIN switch on
the dashboard.
When replacing a flat tire, make sure
to turn off the power sliding door
MAIN switch on the dashboard.
On all models
Closing a sliding door while any
part of a passenger is in the
door’s path can cause serious
injury.
Do not allow anyone to step on the
lower arm of the sliding door while
the door is open. This could damage
the sliding door mechanism.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the doorway before
closing a sliding door.
When you drive with children in your
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page 162 ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
172
Do not put any item in the door
pocket that sticks out from the
pocket. It can prevent the doors from
opening or closing properly, and
damage the vehicle body.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:57:24 31TK8600_178
Sliding Doors
Parking on a Hill
When parking facing downhill, make
sure the doors are latched in the
fully open position, and then hold the
door open for your passengers. Do
not pull the inside or outside door
handle, or the door will slam shut.
If you leave the vehicle on a steep
downhill with a power sliding door
half open and the engine off, the
magnetic lock will turn off after 30
minutes and the sliding door will
automatically open or close. In this
case you will hear a continuous tone.
On all models except LX
If a passenger needs to get out while
you are refueling, instruct that
person to exit on the passenger’s
side.
Make sure the MAIN switch on the
dashboard is in the ON position.
If your vehicle is facing a downhill,
do not turn the MAIN switch to OFF
while the door is operating because
the door may slam shut.
When you close the fuel fill door, the
driver’s side sliding door unlocks if it
was locked when you opened the
fuel fill door.
When parking facing downhill on a
steep grade, the power sliding doors
may not open or close as they do
normally.
On all models except LX
If you open the fuel fill door while
the driver’s side sliding door is
opening, the sliding door stops. If
this happens, the door must be
operated manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
173
Instruments and Controls
Refueling
When you release the fuel fill door,
the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door can be opened.
10/07/17 09:57:34 31TK8600_179
Sliding Doors
How to Reset the Power Sliding
Door
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead while the
sliding door is open, the power
sliding door system needs to be reset.
After reconnecting the battery, close
the sliding door completely by hand.
If the power sliding door is closed,
the system will reset itself
automatically once the battery has
been reconnected.
If the power sliding door does not
operate properly after resetting,
have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
Pinch Sensor
U.S.
Power Sliding
Door Indicator
PINCH SENSOR
On EX, EX-L models
If the power sliding door indicator
comes on and stays on, there is a
problem in the system. Turn the
MAIN switch to OFF, and have the
system inspected by a dealer.
On Touring models
On all models except LX
Each sliding door has a pinch sensor
on the front edge. Do not damage
this sensor, or the power sliding door
may not operate properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
174
Canada
2011 Odyssey
If there is a problem in the power
sliding door system, you will see a
‘‘CHECK LEFT SLIDING DOOR’’ or
‘‘CHECK RIGHT SLIDING DOOR’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 91 ). If this
message stays on, turn the MAIN
switch to OFF, and have the system
inspected by your dealer.
10/07/17 09:57:47 31TK8600_180
Seats
Raises or lowers the
seat. (Driver’s seat
only)
Power Seat Adjustments
See pages 12 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
On LX models
The Driver’s power seat has no
lumbar support.
On all models except LX
The passenger seat has the same
adjustments as the driver’s seat but
without any height and lumbar
adjustments.
Moves the seat
forward and
backward.
Moves the front of
the seat up or down.
(Driver’s seat only)
Adjusts the seatback angle forward
or backward.
Increases or
decreases the
lumbar support.
(Driver’s seat only)
On LX and EX models
The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
175
Instruments and Controls
Moves the whole
seat up and forward,
or down and
backward. The front
of the seat also tilts
up or down at the
same time. (Driver’s
seat only)
The controls for the power
adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
10/07/17 09:57:55 31TK8600_181
Seats
On Touring models
Manual Seat Adjustments
The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
can then select a memorized position
by pushing the appropriate memory
button. Refer to page 190 for how to
memorize and select the seat
positions.
See pages 12 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
The seats in the second and third
rows adjust manually.
On LX and EX models
The front passenger’s seat adjusts
manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Second row outer seat is shown.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.
The third row seats do not adjust
forward and backward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
176
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:58:01 31TK8600_182
Seats
ADJUSTMENT STRAPS
On the front passenger’s manual
adjustable seat and the second row outer
seats
To change the seat-back angle, pull
up on the lever on the outside of the
seat bottom.
ADJUSTMENT STRAP
On the second row center seat
On the third row seats
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull the strap on the right side of the
seat bottom. Move the seat-back to
the desired position and release the
strap. Let the seat-back latch into the
new position.
The left and right halves of the third
seat-back can be adjusted separately.
To adjust the angle, pull the
adjustment strap on the outside of
each seat-back, move the seat-back
to the desired position, and release
the adjustment strap. Let the seatback latch in the new position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
177
Instruments and Controls
Second row outer seat is shown.
10/07/17 09:58:08 31TK8600_183
Seats
Armrests
On EX-L and Touring models
The angle of the armrest on each
front seat is adjustable. On EX-L
model, only the driver’s side is
adjustable. Pivot the armrest down,
and pull it up to the desired angle.
An armrest is located on each of the
front seats and on each side of the
second row seats (depending on
models). Pivot it down to use it.
When you remove the bucket seats
in the second row, pivot the armrests
up out of the way.
The seat-back of the center seating
position of the second row seat can
be used as an armrest; pull the
adjustment strap and pivot it down to
use it.
A beverage holder is located in the
armrest.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
178
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:58:15 31TK8600_184
Seats
Head Restraints
Front and Second row outer seats
See page 14 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
CUSHION
LEGS
RELEASE BUTTON
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
CONTINUED
179
Instruments and Controls
SEATBACK
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from the likelihood of
whiplash and other injuries.
10/07/17 09:58:22 31TK8600_185
Seats
Third row outer seats
Third row center seat
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
RELEASE BUTTON
RELEASE BUTTON
Removing the Head Restraint
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button,
then pull the restraint out of the seatback.
For Third Row Seat Outer Head
Restraints
The seat-back must be folded
forward (see page 177 ) to get ceiling
clearance for removal of the head
restraints. InformationProvidedby:
180
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:58:29 31TK8600_186
Seats
Active Head Restraints
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
CONTINUED
181
Instruments and Controls
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
against the likelihood of whiplash
and injuries to the neck and upper
spine.
10/07/17 09:58:38 31TK8600_187
Seats
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
Third Row Seat Access
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
RELEASE LEVER
To get into the third row seats, pull
the release lever on the outside edge
of the second row outer seat. The
seat-back will tilt forward. Then you
can slide the whole seat forward.
RELEASE STRAP
To get out of the third row seats, pull
the release strap on the bottom of
the second row seat-back. The seatback will tilt forward. Then you can
slide the whole seat forward.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, push the whole seat
backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
182
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 09:58:47 31TK8600_188
Seats
HANDLE
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
To remove a seat:
1. Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
LOCK RELEASE LEVER
2. Move the second row seat to the
rear-most position.
3. Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and fold the
seat-back forward.
4. Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever on
the outside of the seat bottom, and
lift the rear of the seat by holding
the handle under the back of the
seat cushion.
5. Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
To reinstall the seat, hook the front
of the seat to the floor, then push the
rear of the seat-back until it locks in
place. Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
183
Instruments and Controls
Removing the Second Row Outer
Seats
Both seats can be removed to give
more cargo capacity.
Do not remove the seats while
driving.
10/07/17 09:58:57 31TK8600_189
Seats
Moving the Second Row Outer
Seats
The second row outer seats can be
moved to the center to provide an
easier access to the third row seat.
Or you can move them to the outer
position if you intend to install two or
three child seats in the second row
seats.
HANDLE
Removing the Second Row MultiFunctional Center Seat
On all models except LX
Your vehicle has a multi-functional
center seat for the second row
center position.
You can remove the multi-functional
center seat when it is not used. Do
not remove the seat while driving.
To move a seat:
To remove a seat:
1. Follow steps 1 and 2 on the
previous section.
2. With the front of the seat hooked
onto the floor, slide the seat
laterally to the center or outer
position. Make sure to move it
until it stops.
3. Lower the seat and push the rear
of the seat-back until it locks in
place. Make sure the seat is
securely latched before driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
184
2011 Odyssey
1. Use the latch plate to release the
center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 187 ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into
the holder on the ceiling and store
the buckles in it.
2. Pull up the adjustment strap, and
fold the seat-back forward.
10/07/17 09:59:06 31TK8600_190
Seats
ADJUSTMENT STRAP
4. Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
Remove any items from the cargo
area before you fold down the third
row seat.
LOCK RELEASE STRAP
To fold the third row seat:
3. Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release strap
under the seat cushion, and lift the
rear of the seat by holding the
seat-back.
1. Unlatch the center seat detachable
seat belt anchor (see page 187 ),
and let the belt retract all the way
into the ceiling. Place the latch
plate and anchor latch into their
holding slots. Make sure both seat
belts on the outer seats are out of
the way.
2. Lower the head restraints to their
lowest positions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
185
Instruments and Controls
To reinstall the seat, hook the front
of the seat to the floor, then push the
rear of the seat-back until it locks in
place. Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
Folding the One-Motion Third
Row ‘‘Magic Seat’’
To create more cargo space, you can
fold the one-motion third row ‘‘Magic
Seat’’ into the floor recess. The right
and left halves can be folded
separately.
10/07/17 09:59:14 31TK8600_191
Seats
INSTRUCTION LABEL
3. Pull and hold the strap on each
seat-back to unlock the front legs
of the third row seat.
4. Pull the seat into the cargo area
floor recess with the strap.
Make sure all items in the cargo
area are secured. Loose items can
fly forward and cause injury if you
have to brake hard. See Carrying
Cargo on page 551 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
186
2011 Odyssey
HANDLES
To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Pull the seat out of the recess by
pulling up on the handle. Pivot the
seat forward all the way. The front
legs of the third row seat will
automatically latch.
10/07/17 09:59:22 31TK8600_192
Seats
STRAPS
Detachable Anchor
Third Row
Second Row
The seat belts in the second and
third row center seats are equipped
with detachable anchors.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
place a key into the slot on the side
of the anchor buckle. Store the
detachable anchor and seat belt latch
plates in the retractor housing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SLOT
Except LX model
For the second row center seat, pivot
down the anchor buckle forward.
Insert a key into the slot on the back
of the anchor buckle to release it.
Store the detachable anchor and seat
belt latch plates in the retractor
housing.
CONTINUED
187
Instruments and Controls
ANCHOR BUCKLE
2. Pull the seat-back upright with the
strap. Make sure the seat is
securely locked into position
before driving.
10/07/17 09:59:29 31TK8600_193
Seats
LATCH PLATE
When the seats are returned to the
upright position, these detachable
anchors should be latched back
properly.
TRIANGLE MARKS
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
SMALL LATCH PLATE
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
If any children are riding in the rear
seats, be sure that any unused seat
belts they can reach are buckled, the
lockable retractor activated, and the
belt fully retracted. See page 22 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
188
2011 Odyssey
ANCHOR
BUCKLE
Third Row Seat is shown.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
10/07/17 09:59:37 31TK8600_194
Seat Heaters
Passenger’s
seat
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
HEATERS
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Driver’s
seat
On all models except LX
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag cutoff system,
there is no heater in the passenger’s
seat-back. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position to use the
heaters.
To use the heaters, press the seat
heater switch. The indicator (amber)
in the switch will come on. There are
three settings in the heaters: HI, LO,
and OFF.
The heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off
after a period of time.
When you press the seat heater
switch once, the heater is set to HI.
Select LO by pressing the seat
heater switch again. To shut down
the heater, press the seats heater
switch until the indicators go off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
189
Instruments and Controls
Do not use the seat heater in the
HI setting for an extended period,
because it draws large amounts of
current from battery.
10/07/17 09:59:45 31TK8600_195
Driving Position Memory System
Your vehicle has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Storing a Driving Position in
Memory
Store a driver’s seat position only
when the vehicle is parked.
Two seat and outside mirror
positions can be stored in separate
memories. You select a memorized
position by pushing the appropriate
button or using the appropriate
remote transmitter (Driver 1 or
Driver 2).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. You cannot add a
new seat position in memory
unless the ignition switch is in the
ON (II) position. You can recall a
memorized position with the
ignition switch in any position.
You can change the ‘‘MEMORY
POSITION LINK’’ setting on the
multi-information display (see page
110 ).
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 175 ).
On Touring models
3. Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 198 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
190
2011 Odyssey
MEMORY BUTTONS
SET BUTTON
4. Press and release the SET button
on the driver’s door. You will hear
a beep. Immediately press and
hold one of the memory buttons (1
or 2) until you hear two beeps.
The indicator in the memory
button will come on. The current
positions of the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors are now stored.
10/07/17 09:59:57 31TK8600_196
Driving Position Memory System
Selecting a Memorized Position
To select a memorized position, do
this:
Fail to press a memory button
within 5 seconds.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
Pressing the SET button again
within 5 seconds.
Readjust the seat position.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps, and the indicator will
remain on.
To stop the system’s automatic
adjustment, do any of these actions:
Press any button on the driver’s
door: SET, 1, or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized positions. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator in the memory button will
go out. To keep this driving position
for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your vehicle’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
191
Instruments and Controls
To cancel the storing procedure
after pressing the SET button, do
any of the following:
10/07/17 10:00:03 31TK8600_197
Power Windows
DRIVER’S
WINDOW SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
PASSENGER’S
WINDOW SWITCH
To close either front window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly
to the second detent, then release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way up. To stop the window from
going all the way up, push down on
the window switch briefly.
INDICATOR
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switch down and hold it. Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
192
AUTO − To open either front
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down to the second
detent, then release it. The window
automatically goes down all the way.
To stop the window from going all
the way down, pull back on the
window switch briefly.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:00:11 31TK8600_198
Power Windows
The windows and the main switch
feature will operate for up to 10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
AUTO REVERSE − If either front
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Opening the Windows and
Moonroof with the Remote
Transmitter
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
NOTE: The driver’s window auto
reverse function is disabled when
you continuously pull up the switch.
On all models except LX
You can open all of the windows and
the moonroof (if equipped) from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors and the tailgate
unlock, and all four windows and
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and moonroof,
release the button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
193
Instruments and Controls
When you push the main switch in,
the indicator comes on and the
passengers’ windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Use the main
switch when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally. To cancel
this feature, push on the switch
again. The switch will pop out and
the indicator will go off.
10/07/17 10:00:18 31TK8600_199
Power Windows
3. To open the windows and
moonroof further, press the
button again (within 10 seconds of
step 1) and hold it. If the windows
and the moonroof stop before the
desired position, repeat steps 1
and 2.
You cannot close the windows or the
moonroof with the remote
transmitter.
Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Close
Open
You can open and close the windows
and the moonroof (if equipped) with
the key in the driver’s door lock.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
194
To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:00:28 31TK8600_200
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and
hold it. All four windows and the
moonroof start to open. To stop
the windows and the moonroof,
release the key.
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
Open
2. Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
3. Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. All four
windows and the moonroof start to
close. To stop the windows and
the moonroof, release the key.
4. To close the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
NOTE: If the windows and the
moonroof stop before the desired
position, repeat steps 2 and 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Tilt
Close
On EX-L and Touring models
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position before operating the
moonroof switch on the ceiling
console.
To open the moonroof fully, pull
back the moonroof switch firmly.
The moonroof opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening
fully, push the switch briefly.
CONTINUED
195
Instruments and Controls
4. To open the windows and the
moonroof further, turn and hold
the key again (within 10 seconds
of step 2).
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
10/07/17 10:00:36 31TK8600_201
Moonroof
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
To open or close the moonroof
partially, pull back or push forward
the moonroof switch lightly and hold
it. The moonroof will stop when you
release the switch.
AUTO REVERSE − If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch.
Opening either front door cancels
this function.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Operating the Moonroof with the
Remote Transmitter or the Key
You can use the remote transmitter
or the key to operate the moonroof
from the outside. Refer to page
194 for details.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
196
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:00:41 31TK8600_202
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
On LX, EX models
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
On EX-L and Touring models
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
197
Instruments and Controls
There is also a sensor on the back of
the mirror. Items hung on the mirror
may block this sensor and af f ect its
perf ormance.
10/07/17 10:00:51 31TK8600_203
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Reverse Tilt Door Mirror
If equipped
SELECTOR SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
198
2011 Odyssey
Both outside door mirrors have a
reverse tilt feature. When in reverse,
the selected mirror will tilt down
slightly to improve your view as you
parallel park. Shifting out of reverse
will return the mirror to its original
position.
To tilt the driver’s mirror, place
the selector switch in the left
position.
To tilt the passenger’s mirror,
place the switch in the right
position.
To turn the feature off, place the
switch in the center position.
10/07/17 10:00:58 31TK8600_204
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Heated Mirrors
HEATED MIRROR SWITCH
Parking Brake
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page 67 ).
Except U.S. LX model
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
199
Instruments and Controls
If the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), the heated mirror
function will come on automatically
for 10 minutes when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
10/07/17 10:01:01 31TK8600_205
Parking Brake
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page 90 ).
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if
the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
200
2011 Odyssey
10/07/19 15:58:26 31TK8600_206
Interior Convenience Items
INTEGRATED SUNSHADES*
COAT HOOKS
BEVERAGE HOLDER
COIN BOX
AC POWER OUTLET*
SUN VISOR
SUNGLASSES HOLDER/
CONVERSATION MIRROR*
VANITY MIRROR
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
UTILITY TRAY/
BEVERAGE HOLDER
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET/
COOL BOX*
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
* : If equipped
REMOVABLE CENTER CONSOLE*
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
201
Instruments and Controls
BEVERAGE HOLDER
10/07/17 10:01:14 31TK8600_207
Interior Convenience Items
Removable Center Console
On all models except LX
MARKS
LEVER
HANDLE
To open the center console, pull up
on the lever, and lift the lid.
You can remove the center console
for access to the second row seats.
To close, lower the lid, and push it
down until it latches.
To remove the center console, pull
up the handle on the bottom on its
front edge to unlock it from the floor,
then raise it forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
202
2011 Odyssey
To install the center console, set the
bottom of its rear edge into the floor
recess by aligning the marks on both
sides, then lock the center console
by pushing down on its front end
until it latches. Make sure it is
securely latched before driving.
10/07/19 15:53:48 31TK8600_208
Interior Convenience Items
Flip-up Trash Bag Ring
On all models except LX
bag or items in it will not fly around
the interior in case of hard braking
or a sudden stop.
TAB
The ring is designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the ring or cause it to collapse.
RING
The flip-up trash bag ring on the rear
of the removable center console
holds a trash bag. The ring may fit
most small plastic bags and some
disposable type beverage holders.
To use the ring, pull up the ring until
it clicks and lift tab before putting
bag in place. Put a bag in the ring,
then push down the tab to catch the
bag in place. Make sure the trash
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
203
Instruments and Controls
Make sure to store the ring when it
is not in use.
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
10/07/17 10:01:28 31TK8600_209
Interior Convenience Items
On all models except LX
Front
You can store small items in the
utility tray on the instrument panel.
Open the tray by pulling on the
bottom edge. A beverage holder is
also equipped inside. To use the
beverage holder, pull beverage
holder arm until it contacts the front
of the tray. Close the tray with a firm
push.
Front
Front
The removable center console has
beverage holders for the front and
second row seat passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
204
2011 Odyssey
On LX models
The front beverage holders are
located between the front seats.
10/07/17 10:01:37 31TK8600_210
Interior Convenience Items
Integrated Sunshades
HOOK
Instruments and Controls
Second Row
Third Row
TAB
On all models except LX
The multi-functional center seat has
a beverage holder on the back of the
seat-back.
The beverage holders for the third
row seat passengers are in the
armrests on the rear side panels.
To use the beverage holder, fold the
seat-back by pulling the seat-back
strap (see page 177 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
On all models except LX
Each rear sliding door has an
integrated sunshade. To use a
sunshade, hold the tab on the top
and pull the sunshade all the way up.
Insert the holes on the sunshade into
the hooks on the window frame. To
store the shade, unhook it, and let it
retract all the way down.
CONTINUED
205
10/07/17 10:01:43 31TK8600_211
Interior Convenience Items
HOOK
The sunshades are intended for use
only when the windows are fully
closed. If a window is opened, the
shade can be blown off its hooks. As
the shade automatically retracts, it
could hit and hurt anyone sitting too
close to the window.
Sunglasses Holder
Push
TAB
To open the sunglasses holder, push
then release the raised detent. It will
unlatch and swing down. To close it,
push it until it latches. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
On Touring models
Each side of the third row seat also
has an integrated sunshade. To use a
sunshade, hold the tab on the top
and pull the sunshade all the way up.
Insert the hook on the tab into the
anchor on the window frame. To
store the shade, unhook it, and let it
retract all the way down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
206
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:01:52 31TK8600_212
Interior Convenience Items
Conversation Mirror
Sun Visor
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
If equipped
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
To switch back to the sunglasses
holder, close the conversation mirror
and then open the sunglasses holder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
207
Instruments and Controls
SUN VISOR
10/07/17 10:02:01 31TK8600_213
Interior Convenience Items
Vanity Mirror
Coat Hooks
Glove Box
Second Row
Third Row
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
the mirror. The lights come on when
you open the cover. Make sure you
close the cover when you are not
using the vanity mirror.
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
208
2011 Odyssey
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
10/07/17 10:02:08 31TK8600_214
Interior Convenience Items
Center Pocket
Cool Box
On EX-L and Touring models
Instruments and Controls
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
BUTTON
Open the center pocket by pressing
the button. Close it with a firm push.
Keep the center pocket closed while
driving. If it’s open, a passenger
could be injured during a crash or
sudden stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
You can store beverage bottles and
cans in the center pocket, and keep
them cool with the air conditioning
system. To keep the inside of the
center pocket cool, press and release
the Cool Box switch. The indicator in
the switch will come on.
CONTINUED
209
10/07/17 10:02:17 31TK8600_215
Interior Convenience Items
Cool air is diverted from the air
conditioning system into the center
pocket.
When the Cool Box is not in use,
turn it off by pressing the Cool Box
switch again. The indicator in the
switch will go out.
NOTE:
Setting the fan speed to high will
help keep the beverages cool at
high cabin temperature.
The system continues to cool the
Cool Box even when the heater is
turned on.
To clean the Cool Box, wipe it with
a cloth dampened with a solution
of mild soap and lukewarm water.
Only keep unopened cans or
resealable containers in the Cool
Box. Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery and electrical components
in or around the Cool Box.
The Cool Box is not a ref rigerator. It
will only keep already chilled
beverages cool.
Do not put loose ice in the Cool Box.
Turn of f the Cool Box switch when
you store items such as CDs, camera,
etc. in the Cool Box.
The air conditioning system will
automatically come on when the
Cool Box is turned on with the Cool
Box switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
210
2011 Odyssey
If the air conditioning system is
turned of f while the Cool Box is in
use, the Cool Box f unction is
automatically turned of f .
If you turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position when the cool box
is in use, the cool box will be
automatically turned of f .
10/07/17 10:02:25 31TK8600_216
Interior Convenience Items
Coin Box
Accessory Power Sockets
Cargo Area
Front
The coin box is located under the
switch panel. To open the coin box,
swing the upper edge of the lid down.
Close it with a firm push.
Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets depending
on the model.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
211
Instruments and Controls
Touring model is shown.
10/07/17 10:02:31 31TK8600_217
Interior Convenience Items
AC Power Outlet
If equipped
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 150
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 150 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
above the third seat armrest on the
driver’s side. To use the AC power
outlet, open the outlet cover. Insert
the plug into the receptacle slightly,
turn it 90° clockwise, then push in
the plug all the way.
Always run the engine when you use
the AC power outlet.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
212
2011 Odyssey
NOTE: The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
10/07/17 10:02:41 31TK8600_218
Interior Lights
Light Control Switch
When the switch is in the OFF position:
Touring model is shown.
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
The individual door lights will
operate when a door is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
ON
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION
The light control switch controls the
individual map lights for the front,
second and third row seating
positions. This switch has three
positions: OFF, door activated, and
ON.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The individual map lights come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
the lens.
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light(s) dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds.
With the light control switch in the
door activated position, all the
individual map lights come on when
you unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page 153 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
213
Instruments and Controls
OFF
None of the lights come on when a
door is opened.
When the switch is in the door activated
position:
10/07/17 10:02:48 31TK8600_219
Interior Lights
With any door or the tailgate left
open, the lights stay on about 15
minutes, then go out.
Individual Map Lights
Front
Second and Third Row
On Touring models
You can change the ‘‘INTERIOR
LIGHT DIMMING TIME’’ setting on
the multi-information display (see
page 113 ).
When the switch is in the ON position:
All the individual map lights come
on and stay on as long as the
switch remains in the ON position.
Push
Push
Push
Turn on the front row individual map
lights by pushing the lens. Push the
lens again to turn it off. With the
light control switch in the door
activated position, the second row
and third row map lights can be
turned on by pushing the lens. Push
the lens again to turn it off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
214
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:02:56 31TK8600_220
Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light
Courtesy Lights
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
ON
On Touring models
To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page
113 .
Instruments and Controls
OFF
FRONT DOOR LIGHT
The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
With the tailgate open, the light
stays on about 30 minutes, then goes
out.
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comes on when you open the driver’s
door. It fades out in about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
The courtesy light in each front door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
215
10/07/17 10:03:00 31TK8600_221
Interior Lights
COURTESY LIGHT
The courtesy light between the map
lights come on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel.
In addition to the courtesy light on
the ceiling, the driver’s and front
passenger’s ambient foot light (if
equipped) comes on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
216
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:03:06 31TK8600_222
Features
On vehicles with navigation system
The climate control system and the
audio system have a voice control
feature. Refer to the navigation
system manual for more information.
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 218
Rear A/C Controls .................... 224
Climate Control System ................ 225
Audio System ................................. 234
LX model
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 236
Playing a Disc ................................. 243
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 250
EX, EX-L models
without navigation system
Audio System ................................. 251
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 252
Playing the XM Radio ................. 260
Playing a Disc ................................. 266
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 275
Playing CD Library Audio ............ 276
Playing an iPod ............................. 286
iPod Error Messages .................. 294
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device .. 295
USB Flash Memory Device Error
Messages .................................... 303
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 304
Wallpaper Setup ............................. 309
Display Setup.................................. 312
Setting the Clock ........................... 315
Setting the Language .................... 317
Models with navigation system
Audio System ................................. 318
Playing the FM/AM Radio ........... 319
Radio
. 332
Playing the XM
I
nf
or
mat
i
o
nPr
ovi
dedb................
y:
2011 Odyssey
Playing a Disc ................................. 339
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 351
Protecting Your Discs ................... 352
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio ..... 355
Playing an iPod ............................. 383
iPod Error Messages .................. 391
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device .. 392
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages.. 403
Bluetooth Audio System .............. 404
FM/AM Radio Reception ............. 409
Remote Audio Controls................. 411
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 412
Radio Theft Protection.................. 413
Rear Entertainment System ......... 414
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment
System......................................... 442
Compass.......................................... 475
Security System ............................. 479
Cruise Control ................................ 480
HomeLink Universal Transceiver...... 483
Parking Sensor System ................. 486
Reaview Camera and Monitor ..... 493
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models without navigation system)..... 495
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink
(Models with navigation system) .... 516
217
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
10/07/17 10:03:11 31TK8600_223
Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX models
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
FRONT CONTROL DISPLAY
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR CONTROL DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL DIAL
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
ON/OFF BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
MODE CONTROL
BUTTON
REAR ON/OFF BUTTON
* : Canadian models
218
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRROR BUTTON*
REAR FAN
CONTROL
BUTTONS
REAR MODE CONTROL BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:03:19 31TK8600_224
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease
them.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
219
Features
Temperature Control
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
10/07/17 10:03:34 31TK8600_225
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Rear Window Defogger
Button
/
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 142 ).
Air flows from the floor
vents. When you select
, the
system automatically switches to
fresh air mode.
If equipped
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Windshield Defroster Button
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays
on with the indicator off.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
220
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:03:49 31TK8600_226
Vents, Heating, and A/C
MAX A/C Button
Ventilation
The ventilation system draws in
outside air, circulates it through the
interior, then exhausts it through
vents near the rear side panels.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
and fresh air mode.
1. Select
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
77 ). If it moves near the red mark,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
1. Pressing the A/C button turns the
air conditioning ON and OFF. The
indicator in the button comes on
when the A/C is ON.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to the lower limit.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
CONTINUED
221
Features
The system automatically turns on
the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode (see page 222 to
use this setting). Air flows from the
center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the
, the
MAX A/C button, or the mode
control button cancels MAX A/C,
but the A/C stays on.
10/07/17 10:04:00 31TK8600_227
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select the MAX A/C mode.
3. The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
and
switches to recirculation mode.
4. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
1. Switch the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to high.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode and turns on the A/C.
The indicator in the A/C button
will not come on (LX and Canadian
DX models), or the A/C ON
indicator will not come on (EX,
EX-L, Touring, and Canadian SE
models), if the A/C was off to
start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
4. Select /
rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from
, the A/C turns off. But
if it was on to start with, it stays on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
222
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:04:07 31TK8600_228
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
CONTINUED
223
Features
The indicator in the A/C button
will not come on (LX and Canadian
DX models), or the A/C ON
indicator will not come on (EX,
EX-L, Touring, and Canadian SE
models), if the A/C was off to
start with.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel next to each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
10/07/17 10:04:16 31TK8600_229
Vents, Heating, and A/C
REAR A/C Controls
To control the rear A/C, press the
REAR ON/OFF button. The rear
control display will come on. You can
adjust the temperature, the mode,
the fan speed and airflow of the rear
passenger compartment on the front
control panel.
Temperature Control
Fan Control
Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
Press the ▲ fan control button to
increase the fan speed and airflow,
and the ▼ button to decrease it. The
fan speed you adjust is shown in the
system display.
Mode Control
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
When
is selected, air flows
from the rear ceiling vents.
When
is selected, air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When
is selected, airflow is
divided between the rear floor vents
and rear ceiling vents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
224
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:04:23 31TK8600_230
Climate Control System
Except LX models
FRONT CONTROL PANEL
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
REAR LOCK BUTTON
SYNC BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MODE BUTTON
2011 Odyssey
225
Features
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
10/07/17 10:04:32 31TK8600_231
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On vehicles with navigation system
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated using
the voice control system. See the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle maintains the
interior temperature you select. The
system also adjusts the fan speed
and airflow levels.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Set the desired temperature with
the temperature control dial.
3. You can set the driver’s side
temperature, the passenger’s side
temperature, and the temperature
of the rear passenger
compartment separately.
The system automatically selects
the proper mix of conditioned
and/or heated air that will, as
quickly as possible, raise or lower
the interior temperature to your
preference. The system also
dehumidifies the interior.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
226
2011 Odyssey
Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature, the
passenger’s side temperature and
the rear passenger compartment
temperature can be set separately.
Turning each temperature control
dial on the front control panel
clockwise will increase the
temperature of airflow. On the rear
control panel, press the ▲ button to
increase the temperature of airflow.
Press the ▼ button to decrease it.
Each set temperature is shown in the
display. The rear set temperature is
shown in the display on the ceiling
above the second row seat outer
position.
10/07/17 10:04:38 31TK8600_232
Climate Control System
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
SYNC Button
When you press this button, the
indicator in the button comes on, and
the passenger’s side temperature
and the rear passenger compartment
is synchronized to the driver’s side
set temperature. Changing the
passenger’s side temperature or
pressing any control button for the
rear passenger compartment makes
the indicator go off, and takes the
system out of SYNC mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
227
Features
When you press a fan control button,
the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.
On vehicles with navigation system
In the Auto mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver, front passenger, and rear
passengers according to each
adjusted temperature. The system
also regulates each temperature
based on the information of the
sunlight sensor and the sun’s
position which is updated
automatically by the navigation’s
global positioning system (GPS). For
example, if the driver’s side of the
vehicle is getting too much sun, the
system will adjust to a lower
temperature.
10/07/17 10:04:50 31TK8600_233
Climate Control System
To Turn Everything Off
To turn the system completely off,
press the ON/OFF button.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Fan Control
▲ button to increase
Press the
the fan speed and airflow. Press the
▼ button to decrease it.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control below the
outside temperature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
228
2011 Odyssey
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent through the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
10/07/17 10:05:04 31TK8600_234
Climate Control System
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 142 ).
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Windshield Defroster Button
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When the indicator in the button is
on, the front passenger’s
temperature cannot be set separately
from the driver’s.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
229
Features
Mode Control
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
10/07/17 10:05:11 31TK8600_235
Climate Control System
Rear Climate Controls
REAR CONTROL PANEL
REAR PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
AUTO BUTTON
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Rear Lock Button
When this button is on, you will see
LOCK on the system display. The
rear climate controls can only be
controlled by the front control panel.
The rear system automatically
changes to AUTO mode and adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels to
maintain the selected temperature of
the rear passenger compartment.
AUTO LOCK will be displayed on
the rear control panel.
230
ON/OFF BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
When this button is on while the
system is in SYNC mode, the rear
climate control system will be kept in
SYNC mode and the rear control
panel will be disabled. AUTO LOCK
SYNC will be displayed on the rear
control panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:05:22 31TK8600_236
Climate Control System
Temperature Control
Fan Control
Press the ▲ temperature control
button to increase the temperature
of airflow, and the ▼ button to
decrease it. The temperature you
adjust is shown in the system display.
▲ fan control button
Press the
to increase the fan speed and airflow.
▼ button to
Press the
decrease it. The level of the fan
speed is shown in the display.
Automatic Operation
Pressing the AUTO button puts the
system in automatic operation mode.
The rear system automatically
adjusts the fan speed and airflow
levels to maintain the selected
temperature of the rear passenger
compartment. You will see AUTO in
the display.
When
is selected, air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When
is selected, airflow is
divided between the rear floor vents
and rear ceiling vents.
Features
Mode Control
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
To turn the rear system completely
off, press the ON/OFF button on the
rear control panel or press and hold
the REAR LOCK button on the front
control panel for more than 2
seconds.
When
is selected, air flows
from the rear ceiling vents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
231
10/07/17 10:05:28 31TK8600_237
Climate Control System
Triple Zone Temperature Control
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side are
controlled independently.
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
When the REAR LOCK button is off,
the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment can be
controlled independently.
When you set each temperature to
its lower limit or its upper limit, it will
be displayed as ‘‘
’’ or ‘‘
’’.
Rear passenger compartment
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
232
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:05:34 31TK8600_238
Climate Control System
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR
Features
The climate control system has two
sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of
the dashboard, and a temperature
and humidity sensor next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
233
10/07/19 14:29:27 31TK8600_239
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
Without Navigation system
LX models
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX-L models and
Canadian EX models
For LX models, see pages
236 through 250 .
For vehicles without navigation
system, see pages 251 through 308 .
For vehicles with navigation system,
see pages 318 through 408 .
EX-L and Canadian EX
models with Rear
Entertainment System
For vehicles with rear entertainment
system, see pages 414 through 474 .
U.S. models are shown.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
234
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:05:53 31TK8600_240
Audio System
With Navigation system
Features
U.S. EX-L models
Touring models
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
235
10/07/17 10:05:59 31TK8600_241
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
DISPLAY
FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
TITLE BUTTON
PRESET BUTTON
/VOL (POWER/VOLUME) KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
FOLDER BAR
A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON
TUNE/
SKIP
BUTTONS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
236
2011 Odyssey
(SOUND) KNOB
10/07/17 10:06:10 31TK8600_242
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see page
239 .
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
), then release it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Each time you press and release
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
), the radio frequency changes
in small increments.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
CONTINUED
237
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
10/07/17 10:06:18 31TK8600_243
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
six stations each.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
that preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
238
2011 Odyssey
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 409 .
10/07/17 10:06:26 31TK8600_244
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
Program Service (PS) Name Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display shows ‘‘RDS INFO OFF.’’
CONTINUED
239
Features
The program service name display
function shows the name of the
station you are listening to. You can
turn this function on or off.
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message on
the display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name and the RDS icon will
appear.
10/07/17 10:06:38 31TK8600_245
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side of the FOLDER bar (+ or −)
to display and select an RDS
category. The principal RDS
categories are shown as follows;
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category. The
display shows the selected RDS
category name for about 10 seconds.
You can use the search or scan
function to find radio stations on the
selected RDS category. If you do
nothing while the RDS category
name is displayed, the selected
category is canceled.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
240
RDS Program Search
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
first press either side of the
FOLDER bar to select an RDS
category, then press and release
either of the SKIP buttons (
or
). You will see the selected
RDS category name blinking while
searching it. When the system finds
a station, the selected RDS category
name will be displayed again for
about 10 seconds.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:06:43 31TK8600_246
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
RDS Program SCAN
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function is
off. In this case, the display shows a
frequency in place of a RDS station
name.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
Features
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
first press either side of the
FOLDER bar to select an RDS
category, then press and release the
SCAN button. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal in the
selected RDS category. You will also
see the selected RDS category name
blinking while searching it. When it
finds a strong signal, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
241
10/07/17 10:06:55 31TK8600_247
Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the TUNE/
(SOUND)
knob repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBW (subwoofer), and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
Except SVC adjustment
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE/
(SOUND) knob to adjust the
setting to your liking.
The system will return to the audio
display about 10 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC
MID,
SVC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedand
by:
242
2011 Odyssey
HIGH. Turn the TUNE/
(SOUND) knob to adjust the
setting to your liking. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose
high.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 140 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
10/07/17 10:07:01 31TK8600_248
Playing a Disc (LX model)
DISPLAY
Features
CD BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
DISC EJECT BUTTON
DISC SLOT
SCAN BUTTON
/VOL (POWER/VOLUME) KNOB
FOLDER BAR
RPT/RDM (REPEAT/RANDOM) BAR
TUNE/
(SOUND) KNOB
SKIP
BUTTONS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
243
10/07/17 10:07:08 31TK8600_249
Playing a Disc (LX model)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
display. A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
If you have a disc that is a
combination of CD-DA tracks and
MP3/WMA files, you can choose the
format to listen by pressing and
holding CD button until you hear a
beep.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
244
2011 Odyssey
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays UNSUPPORTED, and then
skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
10/07/17 10:07:15 31TK8600_250
Playing a Disc (LX model)
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3, WMA or AAC you
can see the folder and file name, and
the artist, album, and track tag.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 352 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
245
Features
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
10/07/17 10:07:24 31TK8600_251
Playing a Disc (LX model)
The display shows up to about 14
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 14
characters, you will see the first 14
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 14
characters are shown.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3, WMA or AAC.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3, WMA or AAC the display
shows the folder and file name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
246
2011 Odyssey
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3,
WMA or AAC mode).
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
SKIP button, the
player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3, WMA or AAC mode). Press
and release the
to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
SKIP
button.
10/07/17 10:07:31 31TK8600_252
Playing a Disc (LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files in
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT side of the
RPT/RDM bar twice. You will see
F-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT side of the bar
again to turn it off. Pressing the
RDM side of the bar, or selecting a
different folder with the FOLDER
bar also turns off the repeat feature.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT side of
the RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPT
in the display. Press and hold the
RPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,
press the RDM side of the bar
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM side of
the bar for 2 seconds to return to
normal play.
Each time you press and release the
RPT side of the bar, the mode
changes from file repeat to folder
repeat, then to normal play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
247
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the FOLDER bar. Press the
+ side of the bar to skip to the next
folder, and the − side of the bar to
skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
10/07/17 10:07:39 31TK8600_253
Playing a Disc (LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM side of the RPT/
RDM bar. You will see F-RDM in the
display. The system will then select
and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM side of the bar again, or by
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar.
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a 10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button until you hear a beep
to get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
also turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
RDM side of the bar, the mode
changes from folder random play to
random play (within a disc random
play), then to normal play.
In MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file in each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,
selecting a different folder with the
FOLDER bar, or pressing the SCAN
button, also turns off the folder scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
248
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:07:45 31TK8600_254
Playing a Disc (LX model)
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 352 .
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD button again to switch
back to the disc player.
Features
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and begin
playing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
249
10/07/17 10:07:52 31TK8600_255
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 353 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 353). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
250
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:08:00 31TK8600_256
Audio System (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Selector Knob
SETUP BUTTON
The knob turns left and right. Use it
to scroll through lists, or to make
selections or adjustments to a list or
menu item on the display. When you
make a selection, push the center of
the selector to go to that selection.
RETURN BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
Pressing the SETUP button again
will also cancel the setup display
mode.
Most audio system functions can be
controlled by standard buttons, bars,
and knobs. In addition, you can
access some functions by using the
selector knob on the audio system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
251
Features
When the audio system is in XM
Radio mode or playing discs, pushing
the selector knob switches the
display between the normal display
and the extended display.
SETUP Display
To select any setting such as the
clock or sound adjusting, press the
SETUP button. To use any audio
system function, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position. You can select the
item by turning the selector knob.
To go back to the previous display,
press the RETURN button.
10/07/17 10:08:07 31TK8600_257
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX-L models
Canadian EX and EX-L models
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
AM/FM BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
(FOLDER
BAR)
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
252
PRESET BUTTONS
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:08:15 31TK8600_258
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
To Play the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob. Adjust the
volume by turning the same knob.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
On the FM band, you can also use
the features provided by the radio
data system (RDS). For more
information on the RDS, see
page 255.
SKIP − The skip function searches
up and down from the current
frequency to find a station with a
strong signal. To activate it, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then
release it.
Features
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button, or AM/FM button. On
the FM band, ST will be displayed if
the station is broadcasting in stereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the selector knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
253
10/07/17 10:08:23 31TK8600_259
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
When the system finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
2. Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. You can store one frequency
on FM1, and one frequency on
FM2 with each preset button.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
254
2011 Odyssey
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Push the SETUP button to display
the setup MENU. Turn the selector
knob to select Auto Select, then
press the selector knob. The display
changes to the auto select mode.
Select ‘‘PUSH TO START’’ or ‘‘ON,’’
then press the selector knob. You
will see Auto Select on the display,
and the system goes into the auto
select mode for several seconds.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
10/07/17 10:08:32 31TK8600_260
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 409 .
RDS INFO Display
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
The RDS information display
function shows the name of the RDS
station you are listening to. With the
audio system on and the FM band
selected, you can turn this function
on or off.
Features
To cancel auto select, select Auto
Select on the setup menu again and
turn the selector knob to select
‘‘PUSH TO CANCEL’’ or ‘‘OFF,’’
then press the selector knob. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
On EX models
To switch the function between on
and off, press and release the TITLE
button. With the system on, you will
see the ‘‘RDS INFO ON’’ message
briefly on the display. If the station
you are listening to is an RDS station,
the display shows the station name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
255
10/07/17 10:08:44 31TK8600_261
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the display
continues to show the frequency
with the PS name display function on.
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
display briefly shows ‘‘RDS NAME
OFF.’’
On EX-L models
If the station you are listening to is
an RDS station, the RDS icon
appears in the display. To switch the
function between on and off, press
and release the TITLE button. With
the system on, you will see the
station name on the display.
You can turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program category
provided by the RDS. Press either
side (− or +) of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to display
and select an RDS category. The
principal RDS categories are shown
as follows:
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
256
2011 Odyssey
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
Press either side of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to select an
RDS category. The display shows
the selected RDS category name for
about 10 seconds. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category. If you do nothing while the
RDS category name is displayed, the
selected category is canceled.
10/07/17 10:08:51 31TK8600_262
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
RDS Program SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category. To activate it,
press either side of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to select an
RDS category, then press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see SCAN in the display. The system
will scan for a station with a strong
signal in the selected RDS category.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking while
searching it. When it finds a strong
signal, it will stop and play that
station for about 10 seconds.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
You can use the RDS program
search or scan function even if the
RDS information display function
is off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
257
Features
RDS Program Search
This function searches up and down
a frequency for the strongest signal
from the frequencies that carry the
selected RDS category information.
This can help you to find a station in
your favorite category. To activate it,
press either side of the FOLDER bar
to select an RDS category, then
press and release either side
(
or
) of the SKIP bar. You
will see the selected RDS category
name blinking while searching it.
When the system finds a station, the
selected RDS category name will be
displayed again for about 10 seconds.
10/07/17 10:09:00 31TK8600_263
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
On EX models
U.S. EX models
On EX-L models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
setting. Press the selector knob
again to set your setting.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Press the SETUP button to display
the sound settings. Turn the selector
knob to select an appropriate setting:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER,
BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer), and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
knob to enter the setting, then turn
the selector knob to adjust the
setting.
258
Press the SETUP button to display
the Setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to select Sound Settings, then
press the selector knob. Turn the
selector knob to select an
appropriate setting: Bass, Treble,
Fader, Balance, Subwoofer, and SVC
(speed-sensitive volume
compensation). Press the selector
knob to enter the setting, then turn
the selector knob
to
adjust
the
I
nf
or
mat
i
on
Pr
ov
i
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SUBW (SUBWOOFER) − Adjusts
the strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
10/07/17 10:09:07 31TK8600_264
Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
On U.S. EX models
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 140 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Features
To return to normal play, push the
RETURN or SETUP button after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the selector knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
259
10/07/17 10:09:15 31TK8600_265
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Without rear entertainment system
XM BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
XM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY
BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
260
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP BAR
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:09:23 31TK8600_266
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
You can also change the mode from
the setup menu. Press the SETUP
button to display the setup menu.
Turn the selector knob to select XM
Mode and press the selector knob.
You can select Channel mode or
Category mode by turning and
pressing the selector knob.
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
either press and hold the TITLE
button until the mode changes.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the display changes
from artist name to song name.
In the channel mode, you can select
all of the available channels. In the
category mode, such as Jazz, Rock,
Classical, etc., you can select all of
the channels within that category.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
CONTINUED
261
Features
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
10/07/17 10:09:28 31TK8600_267
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the CATEGORY bar to
select another category.
TUNE − Turn the selector knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
You can also select a channel from
the list by using the selector knob.
Push the selector knob to switch the
display to the list, then turn the knob
to select a channel. Press the
selector knob to set your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
262
2011 Odyssey
SCAN − The SCAN function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the stations within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
10/07/17 10:09:41 31TK8600_268
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
2. Use the selector knob, SKIP bar,
CATEGORY bar or SCAN button
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
button again.
5. Press the
The other XM band will show.
Store the next six channels using
steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, simply
press and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
‘‘UNAUTHORIZED’’ − The
encryption code is being updated.
Wait until the encryption code is
fully updated. Channels 0 and 1
should still work normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘UNAVAILABLE’’ − The selected
channel number does not exist, is
not part of your subscription, or this
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
263
Features
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will show in the
display.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
10/07/17 10:09:49 31TK8600_269
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
264
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
Driving in tunnels.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
multi-tiered
road.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:09:57 31TK8600_270
Playing the XM Radio (EX-L model without navigation system)
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
If you decide to purchase XM radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM CANADA at www.xmradio.ca, or
at 1-877-209-0079. You will need to
give them your radio I.D. number
and your credit card number. To get
your radio I.D. number, press the
button, then turn the
selector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appears
in the display. Your I.D. will appear
in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. XM Radio
will continue to send an activation
signal to your vehicle for at least 12
hours from the activation request. If
the service has not been activated
after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
265
Features
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, press the
button. A variety of music
types and styles will play.
10/07/17 10:10:05 31TK8600_271
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX-L models
Canadian EX and EX-L models
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CD BUTTON
CD BUTTON
DISC
SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
(FOLDER
BAR)
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
266
DISC
SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:10:12 31TK8600_272
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
display. A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Video CDs and DVDs do not work in
this unit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
267
Features
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD
button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes.
Title information will be displayed by
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database).
When you play a CD recorded with
text data, you will see the genre,
artist name, album and track name
on the screen. When you play MP3/
WMA/AAC discs, you will see the
genre, artist name, album name and
track name on the screen. If the disc
was not recorded with this
information, it will not be displayed.
10/07/17 10:10:20 31TK8600_273
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
NOTE:
If a file on a WMA disc is protected
by digital rights management
(DRM), the audio unit displays
UNSUPPORTED, and then skips to
the next file.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
Text Data Display Function
On U.S. EX models
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the display shows you the
text, if the disc was recorded with
text data.
If you select name off, the text
display is turned off.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3, WMA or AAC you
can see the folder and file name, and
the artist, album, and track tag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
268
2011 Odyssey
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
When you press and release the
TITLE button while a disc without
text data is playing, you will see ‘‘NO
INFO’’ on the display.
The display shows up to 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.).
10/07/17 10:10:28 31TK8600_274
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
If the text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 16
characters and the
indicator in
the display. Press and hold the
TITLE button until the next 16
characters are shown. You can see
up to 32 characters of the text data.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3, WMA or AAC.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3, WMA or AAC the display
shows the folder and file name.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
In MP3 or WMA mode, each time
you press and release the TITLE
button, the display changes between
track name and file name.
If any letter is not available, it is
replaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.
When the disc has no text data, you
will see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
269
Features
If you press and hold the TITLE
button again, the display shows the
first 16 characters again.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
10/07/17 10:10:35 31TK8600_275
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Loading Discs
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
352 .
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the player skips forward to the
beginning of the next track (file in
MP3, WMA or AAC mode). Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track or file,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
270
2011 Odyssey
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the recording CD prompt will
appear on the display. If you select
‘‘Yes,’’ the system will start
recording to the flash memory. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see page 278 .
When you insert a CD for the first
time, a Gracenote notification
appears. For more information, see
page 380 .
10/07/17 10:10:44 31TK8600_276
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
You can also select a track from the
list by using the selector knob. Push
the selector knob while playing a CD.
The display switches to the track list.
Then turn the knob to select a track.
Press the selector knob to start your
selected track.
In MP3, WMA or AAC mode, push
the selector knob to switch the
display to the folder list then turn the
knob to select a folder. Press the
selector knob to change the display
to the track/file list, then turn the
selector knob to select a track/file.
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
U.S. EX models
Turn the selector knob to select an
appropriate repeat, random or scan
mode, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
Features
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side (+ or −) of the FOLDER bar
or the CATEGORY bar to move to
the beginning of the next folder.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob to
set the selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
271
10/07/17 10:10:50 31TK8600_277
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
To cancel the selected repeat,
random, or scan mode, press the
SETUP button to show ‘‘PLAY
MODE,’’ then press the selector
knob. When you see ‘‘NORMAL
PLAY,’’ press ENTER again.
REPEAT ONE TRK (Repeat One
Track) − To continuously replay a
track (file in MP3, WMA or AAC
mode), select REPEAT ONE TRK or
Repeat One Track from the menu
items. You will see ‘‘REPEAT’’ or the
track repeat icon in the display.
Select normal play to turn it off.
REPEAT ONE FLD (Repeat One
Folder) − This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder in the order they are
compressed in MP3, WMA or AAC.
To activate folder repeat mode,
select REPEAT ONE FLD or Repeat
One Folder from the menu items.
You will see ‘‘D-REPEAT’’ or the
folder repeat icon in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current list. Select normal play to
turn it off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
272
2011 Odyssey
RANDOM IN FLD (Random in
FOLDER) − This feature, when
activated, plays the files within the
current folder in random order,
rather than in the order they are
compressed in MP3, WMA or AAC.
To activate folder random play,
select RANDOM IN FLD or Random
in FOLDER from the menu items.
You will see ‘‘F-RDM’’ or the folder
random icon in the display. The
system will then select and play files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random play by
selecting normal play, or you select a
different albumlist with the
FOLDER bar or the CATEGORY
bar.
10/07/17 10:10:56 31TK8600_278
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
SCAN TRK (Scan Tracks) − The
SCAN function samples all the
tracks on the disc in the order they
are recorded on the disc (all files in
the selected folder in MP3, WMA or
AAC mode). To activate the scan
feature, press and release the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file in the
disc/folder. Press and hold the
SCAN button to get out of scan
mode and play the last track sampled.
SCAN FLD (Scan Folders) − This
function samples the first file in each
folder on the disc in the order they
are stored. To activate the folder
scan feature, press and release the
SCAN button repeatedly. You will
see ‘‘F-SCAN’’ or ‘‘Folder Scan’’ in
the display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of the first file in each
folder.
You can also select the folder scan
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 271 ).
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 271 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
273
Features
RANDOM (Random in Disc) −
This feature plays the tracks on disc
(the files in MP3, WMA or AAC
mode) in random order. To activate
random play, select RANDOM or
Random in Disc from the menu
items. You will see ‘‘RANDOM’’ or
disc random icon in the display.
Select normal play to return to
normal play.
10/07/17 10:11:02 31TK8600_279
Playing a Disc (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
To turn this feature off, press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds, or press and release the
selector knob while scan mode.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of the disc
mode, press one of other source
buttons than the CD button.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
274
2011 Odyssey
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 352 .
10/07/17 10:11:09 31TK8600_280
Disc Player Error Messages (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 353). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 353).
Mechanical Error
PUSH EJECT
Servo Error
CHECK DISC
Disc Error
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
275
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 353 .
Error Message
10/07/17 10:11:18 31TK8600_281
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX-L models
Canadian EX and EX-L models
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CDL BUTTON
CDL BUTTON
DISC
SLOT
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
(FOLDER
BAR)
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
276
DISC
SLOT
SCAN
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:11:27 31TK8600_282
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
If equipped
The CD Library Audio function can
record tracks from music CDs to the
flash memory. Each music CD is
stored on an albumlist. This audio
system can store up to 18 albums.
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., from CD-R,
DVD-R and USB flash memory
devices cannot be copied to the
CD Library. Likewise, digital
music files recorded in the CD
Library cannot be copied to CD-R,
DVD-R and USB devices.
Although data is recorded using
ultra-efficient compression
technology, sound quality may
vary slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) in
the built-in flash memory. See
page 380 .
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the
copying by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
If the CD Library is ever replaced,
all data will be lost and stored
music will not be recovered.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
277
Features
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to CD
Library are supported.
Music data recorded in the CD
Library can only be used for
personal use.
10/07/17 10:11:38 31TK8600_283
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Recording a Music CD to CD
Library
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
If you turn off the ignition switch
while recording a CD, the CD will
begin recording again when the
power comes back.
1. If you play a music CD that has
not been recorded in the CD
Library, the recording CD prompt
will appear on the display. Select
‘‘YES’’ to start recording to the
flash memory. To turn this display
off, see page 279 .
2. The display will change to the
albumlist. Select the desired
number of the list by turning the
selector knob, then press the
selector knob. The recording icon,
recording album number, and
current recording track number
will appear while recording. When
recording is finished, the
recording icon will be turned off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
278
2011 Odyssey
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at eight times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random
and scan functions are not
available during recording.
10/07/17 10:11:46 31TK8600_284
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
You can listen to tracks from other
albumlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the CD-L button and switch over
to CD Library Audio.
Changing the Recording Settings
To Stop Displaying the Recording CD
Prompt
Each time you press and release the
selector knob, this feature turns on
and off.
U.S. EX models
Features
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
If you don’t wish to display the
recording CD prompt when you
insert a CD for the first time, press
and release the SETUP button and
turn the selector knob to ‘‘CDL
SETUP’’ or ‘‘CD Library Setup,’’ then
press the selector knob and select
‘‘REC PROMPT ON’’ or ‘‘Prompt to
Record CD.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
279
10/07/17 10:11:56 31TK8600_285
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
To Record a CD Manually
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Insert a CD that has not been
recorded in the CD Library, press
the SETUP button and turn the
selector knob to ‘‘CDL SETUP’’ or
‘‘CD Library Setup,’’ then press the
selector knob. Select ‘‘RECORD CD
NOW’’ and press the selector knob.
The display will change to the
albumlist. Select the desired slot and
press the same knob to start
recording.
If you select a slot on the albumlist
that has been recorded, a
confirmation message will appear.
Select ‘‘YES’’ to overwrite the old
album. Select ‘‘NO’’ to return to the
normal display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
280
2011 Odyssey
If you press the EJECT button while
recording a CD, the recording is
stopped. When you insert the same
CD again, the ‘‘RESUME REC’’ or
‘‘Continue REC’’ message will appear.
Select ‘‘YES’’ to restart the recording
feature from the point that the
previous recording was disabled.
10/07/17 10:12:05 31TK8600_286
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Playing Tracks in CD Library
To play tracks in the CD Library,
push the CD-L button until the CD
Library Audio display appears.
Playback will start automatically with
the track previously selected.
Changing a Track/Albumlist
Folder Bar or Category Bar
+
Skip Bar
Returns to the beginning of the
current track. Press again and hold
to return to the beginning of the
previous track. If you press this
bar while the first track is playing,
the last track is selected.
Skips to the beginning of the next
track. If you press this bar while
the last track is playing, the first
track is selected.
Track Selection
You can also select an album or track
from the list by using the selector
knob. Push the selector knob while
in the CD Library mode, the display
will switch to the albumlist. Turn the
selector knob to select an album.
Press the selector knob to change
the display to the track list, then turn
the selector knob to select a track.
Press the selector knob to start
playing the track you wish to play.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also
changes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby: a file.
2011 Odyssey
281
Features
−
The next album in the list is
selected. If you press + while the
last album in the list is selected,
the first album in the list is
selected.
The previous album in the list is
selected. If you press − while the
first album is selected, the last
album in the list is selected.
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
10/07/17 10:12:12 31TK8600_287
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat, Random or
Scan Mode:
U.S. EX models
REPEAT ONE TRK − To
continuously replay a track, select
‘‘REPEAT ONE TRK’’ or ‘‘Repeat
One Track’’ from the menu items
and press the selector knob. You will
see the ‘‘REPEAT’’ or the repeat one
track icon in the display. Select
‘‘NORMAL PLAY’’ to turn it off.
EX-L and Canadian EX models
You can select any type of repeat,
random and scan modes by using the
SETUP button and the selector knob.
Push the SETUP button to display
the menu items, then turn the
selector knob to select ‘‘PLAY
MODE.’’ Press the selector knob to
set the selection.
REPEAT ALBUM − This feature,
when activated, replays all the tracks
on the selected albumlist in the order
they are recorded. To activate this
feature, select ‘‘REPEAT ALBUM’’
and press the selector knob. You will
see the ‘‘ALBUM REPEAT’’ or the
repeat album icon in the display. The
system continuously replays the
current list. Select ‘‘NORMAL
PLAY’’ to turn it off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
282
2011 Odyssey
RANDOM ALBUMS (Random in
Albums) − This feature, when
activated, plays the tracks within the
current albumlist in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded. You will see ‘‘D-RDM’’ or
the random album icon in the display.
The system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate random album
play by selecting ‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’
or you select a different albumlist
with the FOLDER bar or the
CATEGORY bar.
RANDOM (Random All) − This
feature plays all tracks within a CD
Library in random order. You will
see ‘‘RANDOM’’ or random all icon
in the display. Select ‘‘NORMAL
PLAY’’ to return to normal play.
10/07/17 10:12:21 31TK8600_288
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
You can also select the scan feature
from the menu items with the
selector knob (see page 282 ).
SCAN ALBUM − This function
samples the first track in each
albumlist in the order they are stored.
To activate the scan album feature,
press and release the SCAN button
repeatedly. You will see ‘‘D-SCAN’’
or ‘‘Scan Albums’’ in the display. You
will get a 10 second sampling of the
first track in each list. Press and hold
the SCAN button to get out of the
scan album mode and play the last
track sampled.
You can also select the scan album
feature from the menu items with
the selector knob (see page 282 ).
Pressing the selector knob turns off
the scan or scan album feature.
Deleting an Album
1. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CDL
SETUP’’ or ‘‘CD Library Setup.’’
Then press the selector knob.
2. Select ‘‘DELETE ALBUM’’ or
‘‘Delete Library Album,’’ then
press the selector knob.
3. The display will change to the
albumlist. Select the album that
you want to delete, press the
selector knob.
4. The confirmation message is
displayed. Select ‘‘YES’’ to delete
album completely.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan track to scan album
feature, then to normal play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
283
Features
SCAN TRK (Scan Tracks) − The
SCAN function samples all the
tracks on the albumlist in the order
they were recorded. To activate this
feature, press and release the SCAN
button. You will see ‘‘SCAN’’ in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track in the list.
Press and hold the SCAN button to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track sampled.
10/07/17 20:21:20 31TK8600_289
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
1. On the CD Library Audio display,
press the SETUP button.
On U.S. EX model
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘CDL
SETUP,’’ then press the selector
knob.
2. Turn the selector knob to ‘‘GET
ALBUM INFO.,’’ then press the
selector knob. The display will
change to the albumlist.
3. Select the title information for the
albumlist, then press the selector
knob. You will be returned to the
normal display.
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info. (Gracenote Media
Database).
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.honda.com (in U.S.), or
www.honda.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot.
2. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CDL
SETUP’’ or ‘‘CD Library Setup,’’
then press the selector knob.
If more than one title is found for
the CD inserted, a screen will
appear to select the correct title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
284
2011 Odyssey
3. Select ‘‘UPDATE ALBUM DB’’ or
‘‘Update Album Info DB,’’ then
press the selector knob.
4. On U.S. EX model
Press the selector knob to start
updating.
On EX-L and Canadian EX models
Select ‘‘Yes’’ on the confirmation
screen, and press the selector
knob to start updating.
After finishing the update, you will
be returned to the normal display.
10/07/17 10:12:40 31TK8600_290
Playing CD Library Audio (EX, EX-L models without navigation system)
Checking Album Info DB Version
1. Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘CDL
SETUP’’ or ‘‘CD Library Setup,’’
then press the selector knob.
3. The display will show you the
current Album Info DB Version.
Press the RETURN button to
return to the CD Library Setup
menu.
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information, please visit
http://www.gracenote.com/.
Features
2. Select ‘‘ALBUM DB VER.’’ or
‘‘Album Info DB Version,’’ then
press the selector knob.
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
For more information, see page 380 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
285
10/07/17 10:12:46 31TK8600_291
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
ALBUM ART
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX BUTTON
USB/AUX BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
286
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:12:53 31TK8600_292
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Model
iPod 5th and 6th
generations
iPod classic
iPod nano
1st generation
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod nano
4th generation
iPod nano
5th generation
iPod touch
1st generation
iPod touch
2nd generation
iPod touch
3rd generation
iPhone
iPhone 3G
iPhone 3GS
Software
Ver. 1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.4 or more
Ver. 1.0.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more
Ver. 3.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 5.12.1 or more
CONTINUED
287
Features
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the glove box by using your dock
connector, then press the USB/AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
charged with the ignition switch in
these settings.
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
10/07/17 10:13:03 31TK8600_293
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
Connecting an iPod
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Open the glove box, and unclip the
USB adapter cable.
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
288
DOCK CONNECTOR
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:13:12 31TK8600_294
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
www.apple.com/itunes/
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are on the
display. It also shows the artist,
album and track (file) names on the
display.
If a file on your iPod has an album
art, it will be shown in the display.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Features
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
You can also select a file from any
list on the iPod menu: playlists,
artists, albums, songs, genres,
composers and podcasts by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob to switch the display to an iPod
menu, then turn the selector knob to
select a desired list. Press the
selector knob to set your selection.
CONTINUED
289
10/07/17 10:13:18 31TK8600_295
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press the
selector knob to set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
290
2011 Odyssey
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and software.
10/07/17 10:13:25 31TK8600_296
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: Normal Play, Repeat One
Track, Shuffle All, Shuffle Repeat,
Shuffle Albums, or Shuffle Album
Repeat, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
You can select any type of repeat and
shuffle mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press
the selector knob to set the selection.
Features
To cancel the selected mode, press
the selector knob and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘Play Mode,’’
then press the selector knob. When
you see ‘‘Normal Play,’’ press the
selector knob again.
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. You will see
the repeat icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
291
10/07/17 10:13:30 31TK8600_297
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
Shuffle All − This feature plays all
available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, composers and podcasts) in
random order. You will see the
shuffle all icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn off this feature.
Shuffle Repeat − This feature
repeats the shuffle all feature. When
the system finishes playing the
shuffle all feature, it will repeat
playing the songs in the same
shuffled order. You will see the
shuffle all and the repeat icon in the
display. Select normal play to turn off
this feature.
Shuffle Albums − This feature
plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums,
songs and genres) in random order.
The files in each album are played in
the recorded order. You will see the
shuffle albums icon in the display.
Select normal play to turn off this
feature.
Shuffle Albums Repeat − This
feature repeats the shuffle album
feature. When the system finishes
playing the shuffle album feature, it
will repeat playing the albums in the
same shuffled order. You will see the
shuffle albums and the repeat icon in
the display. Select normal play to
turn off this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
292
2011 Odyssey
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
10/07/17 10:13:38 31TK8600_298
Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To take the system out of the iPod
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
select it.
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
iPod Error Messages
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 294 .
Features
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the display shows No
Data.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
293
10/07/22 15:40:19 31TK8600_299
iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message
Solution
USB ERROR
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the iPod is empty. Store some files in the iPod.
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. Disconnect the
device.
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. See page 287 for
specification information for iPods. If it appears when a supported
iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect
the iPod.
UNSUPPORTED VER.
CONNECT RETRY
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
294
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:13:49 31TK8600_300
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
USB INDICATOR
ALBUM ART
Features
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX BUTTON
USB/AUX BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
SELECTOR KNOB
295
10/07/17 10:13:56 31TK8600_301
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files from a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play a USB flash memory
device, connect it to the USB adapter
cable in the glove box, then press the
USB/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
296
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as the device
or your files may be damaged.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:14:04 31TK8600_302
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
297
Features
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
10/07/17 10:14:11 31TK8600_303
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
When the USB flash memory device
is connected, the USB indicator is
shown in the display.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
USB ADAPTER CABLE
If a file on your USB flash memory
device has an album art, it will be
shown in the display.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Open the glove box, and unclip the
USB adapter cable.
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
298
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:14:19 31TK8600_304
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or left also changes a file.
Features
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
You can also select a file from any
list on the USB top menu: artists,
albums, songs, genres, by using the
selector knob. Push the selector
knob to switch the display to the
USB top menu, then turn the
selector knob to select a desired list.
Press the selector knob to set your
selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The display shows items on the
selected list. Turn the selector knob
to select an item, then press the
selector knob to set your selection.
CONTINUED
299
10/07/17 10:14:26 31TK8600_305
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
Turn the selector knob to select a
play mode: Normal Play, Repeat One
Track, Random All or Random
Repeat, then press the selector knob
to set your selection.
To cancel the selected mode, press
the selector knob and turn the
selector knob to show ‘‘Play Mode,’’
then press the selector knob. When
you see ‘‘Normal Play,’’ press the
selector knob again.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
Pressing the RETURN button goes
back to the previous display.
You can select any type of repeat and
random mode by using the SETUP
button and the selector knob. Press
the SETUP button to display the
menu items, then turn the selector
knob to select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press
the selector knob to set the selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
300
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:14:30 31TK8600_306
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
Random All − This feature plays
all available files in a selected list
(artists, albums, songs or genres) in
random order. You will see the
random all icon in the display. Select
the normal play mode to turn off this
feature.
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. You will see
the repeat icon in the display. Select
normal play to turn it off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
301
Features
Random Repeat − This feature
repeats the random all feature.
When the system finishes playing
the random all feature, it will repeat
playing the files in the same random
order. You will see the random all
and repeat icons in the display.
Select the normal play to turn off this
feature.
10/07/17 10:14:35 31TK8600_307
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To take the system out of the USB
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select it.
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
302
2011 Odyssey
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the display shows No Data.
10/07/17 10:14:39 31TK8600_308
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)
If you see an error message on the
audio display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Solution
USB ERROR
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
There is a problem with the USB adapter unit.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Appears when the files in the USB flash memory device are DRM or
an unsupported format. This error message appears for a few seconds,
then plays the next song.
Appears when the USB flash memory device is empty or there are no
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device. Save some
MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash memory device.
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. See page 297 for
specification information on USB flash memory devices. If it appears
when the supported device is connected, reconnect the device.
UNPLAYABLE FILE
NO SONG
UNSUPPORTED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
303
Features
Error Message
10/07/17 10:14:45 31TK8600_309
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth Indicator
Without rear entertainment system
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX BUTTON
USB/AUX BUTTON
SKIP BAR
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
RETURN
BUTTON
SETUP
BUTTON
SELECTOR KNOB
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
304
2011 Odyssey
SELECTOR KNOB
10/07/17 10:14:54 31TK8600_310
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
handsfreelink.honda.com or call
888-528-7876. In Canada, visit
www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
888-528-7876.
Until the phone is recognized, you
will see ‘‘No Connect’’ on the display.
This message will go off when the
phone is recognized, then the system
begins to play.
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
*: If an iPod or USB flash memory
device or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB, or AUX in
the display. Push the USB/AUX
button again to play audio files
from your Bluetooth Audio
phone.
CONTINUED
305
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 501 ).
Press the USB/AUX button* with
the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
When the phone is recognized, you
will see the Bluetooth indicator and
Bluetooth Audio message or text
data (album, artist, and song name)
on a phone in the display.
10/07/17 10:15:02 31TK8600_311
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
NOTE: The text display function
may not be available on some phone
devices.
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be a
delay before the system begins to
play.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘No Connect’’
message.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
306
2011 Odyssey
To skip a file
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
Turning the selector knob to the
right or the left also changes the file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
10/07/17 10:15:11 31TK8600_312
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
Repeat One Track − This feature
continuously plays a file. Select
normal play to turn it off.
To Select Repeat or Random Mode:
You can select repeat and random
mode by using the SETUP button
and the selector knob. Push the
SETUP button to display the menu
items, then turn the selector knob to
select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press the
selector knob to set the selection.
Random All − This feature plays
all available files in random order.
Select the normal play to turn off this
feature.
NOTE: The repeat or random play
function may not be available on
some phone devices.
Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘Repeat One Track’’ or ‘‘Random All,’’
then press the selector knob to set
your selection.
Turn the selector to select Resume/
Pause mode, then press the selector
knob to set your selection. Repeat to
resume play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
307
Features
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily. Press the
SETUP button to display the setup
menu, then turn the selector knob to
select ‘‘Play Mode.’’ Press the
selector knob to enter the play mode
menu.
10/07/17 10:15:18 31TK8600_313
Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The display switches to the
HFL mode (see page 496 ).
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
To take the system out of the
Bluetooth Audio mode, press one of
the other source buttons than the
USB/AUX button. When a
compatible audio unit is connected to
the auxiliary input jack, press the
USB/AUX button to select it.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
308
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:15:26 31TK8600_314
Wallpaper Setup
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
Import Picture from USB
Features
The wallpaper setup function can
change, store or delete the wallpaper
on the display. You can store up to
five pictures from USB flash
memory devices. Two default
wallpapers are already stored.
On vehicles with navigation system
Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the
wallpaper setup.
1. Connect the USB flash memory
device that includes pictures you
want to store. Press the SETUP
button to display the setup menu.
Turn the selector knob to
‘‘Wallpaper Setup’’ and press the
selector knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
2. The display will change to the
wallpaper setup menu. Turn the
selector knob to ‘‘Import Picture
from USB,’’ then press the
selector knob.
If the USB flash memory device
does not have any picture, ‘‘No
Files’’ message will appear on the
display.
CONTINUED
309
10/07/17 10:15:33 31TK8600_315
Wallpaper Setup
3. Turn the selector knob to select a
desired picture, then press the
knob to import the picture.
‘‘Loading Picture’’ message will
appear on the display.
NOTE:
If you choose an incompatible
picture, such as one that is too
large or in an unsupported format,
a message will appear and the
system will not be able to import
the picture.
You can only import images from
the root directly. Images in the
folders cannot be imported.
4. The display will change to as
shown above. Select OK to import
the picture to the system. The
imported list number and the
confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
import wallpaper list.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
310
2011 Odyssey
The max file size is 1024 × 768
pixels. Smaller images are
displayed with the extra area
appearing in black.
Larger images are reduced to a
displayable size without changing
the aspect ratio.
10/07/17 09:47:14 31TK8600_098
Wallpaper Setup
Five uploaded images (in BMP or
JPEG format) can be saved.
You cannot import images while
driving.
Delete Wallpaper
On the wallpaper setup menu, select
‘‘Delete Picture from mem’’ and
press the selector knob. The screen
will change to the Delete Wallpaper
list. Select the picture that you want
to delete, then press the selector
knob. The confirmation message will
appear. Select ‘‘Yes’’ to delete
completely.
You can also select ‘‘Default
Wallpaper’’ (Honda logo) or ‘‘Clock’’
(analog) on the list.
You can confirm the wallpaper which
you selected. Press the DISPLAY
button, and select Wallpaper by
turning and pressing the selector
knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
311
Features
If you attempt to upload an image
with the same name as an existing
image, a pop-up screen will appear,
asking if you want to overwrite the
existing image file.
Choose Wallpaper
On the wallpaper setup menu, select
‘‘Choose Wallpaper,’’ then press the
selector knob. The screen will
change to the wallpaper list. Select
desired wallpaper and press the
selector knob. Your selection will be
indicated by the filled in circle.
10/07/17 10:15:50 31TK8600_317
Display Setup
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
To adjust the display, highlight
‘‘Display Setup’’ from the setup menu
with the selector knob. You can
adjust these display settings:
Brightness
Contrast
Menu Color
1. Press the SETUP button to display
the setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to ‘‘Display Setup’’ and press
the selector knob.
2. On the display setup menu, select
adjustment menu and press the
selector knob to enter the setting.
Adjust the setting by turning the
selector knob.
3. If you want to adjust the Menu
Color, select it by turning the
selector knob and press the
selector knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
312
2011 Odyssey
4. The display will change to as
shown above. You can change the
color of the screen to blue, red,
amber, gray. Turn the selector
knob to the setting you want, then
press the selector knob.
Press and release the RETURN
button to go back to the setup
menu.
10/07/17 10:16:01 31TK8600_318
Display Setup
Display Button
DISPLAY BUTTON
For information on instant fuel
economy, average fuel economy,
distance (trip meter) and range, see
page 78 .
Features
SELECTOR
KNOB
Trip Computer
When you select the trip computer,
the display shows the instant fuel
economy, average fuel economy,
distance (trip meter), average speed,
elapsed time, and range.
Average Speed
This shows the average speed you
are traveling in miles per hour (mph)
for U.S. models or kilometers per
hour (km/h) for Canadian models.
You can select one of the four types
of screen by pressing the Display
button, then turning and pressing
the selector knob.
Audio Display
Elapsed Time
When you select ‘‘Audio Display,’’
the screen shows you the audio
information currently selected.
This shows the accumulated
traveling time since you last reset it.
You can reset the Trip Computer,
see page 314 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
313
10/07/17 10:16:07 31TK8600_319
Display Setup
Trip Computer Reset
You can reset all data on the Trip
Computer. To reset the trip
computer, press the SETUP button
to display the setup menu. Turn the
selector knob to Trip Computer
Reset, and press the selector knob.
Select Trip A or Trip B by turning
the selector knob, then press the
selector knob. A confirmation
message will appear. Select ‘‘Yes’’
and press the selector knob to
completely reset.
314
Wallpaper
Minimum Display
When you select ‘‘Wallpaper,’’ the
display changes to your favorite
screen. The minimum display
information also appear on the upper
part of the screen. See page 309 for
how to set up the wallpaper.
When you select ‘‘Minimum Display,’’
you will see only the compass, audio
status, and clock on the upper part of
the display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:16:19 31TK8600_320
Setting the Clock
EX, EX-L models
On Vehicles without Navigation
System
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you may
need to set the clock.
MINUTE BUTTON
Without rear
entertainment
system
With rear
entertainment
system
On LX models
HOUR
BUTTON
Features
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
CLOCK
BUTTON
CLOCK BUTTON
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CLOCK BUTTON
1. To set the time, press and release
the CLOCK button. The display
will change to the clock adjust
screen.
You can also set the time from the
setup menu.
Press the SETUP button to display
the setup menu. Turn the selector
knob to ‘‘CLOCK ADJUST’’ and
press the selector knob.
CONTINUED
315
10/07/17 10:16:26 31TK8600_321
Setting the Clock
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
3. Turn the selector knob to change
the setting between 12H and 24H,
and count the numbers up or down.
4. To enter the clock setting, press
the selector knob repeatedly to
select ‘‘SET’’ or ‘‘EXIT,’’ then press
the knob. The display will return
to the setup menu.
2. Press the selector knob to select
the item which you want to adjust.
Each time you press the selector
knob, the selected item changes
between hours, minutes, SET and
EXIT. The selected item is
indicated with △ in the display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
316
2011 Odyssey
On vehicles with navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
10/07/17 10:16:31 31TK8600_322
Setting the Language
EX-L models without navigation system
and Canadian EX model
Turn the selector knob to the
language you want, then press the
selector knob to change the display.
Press and release the RETURN
button to go back to the setup menu.
Features
You can change the display language
to English, Spanish, or French. Press
the SETUP button to display the
setup menu. Turn the selector knob
to ‘‘Language’’ and press the selector
knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
317
10/07/17 10:16:37 31TK8600_323
Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Interface Dial
Most audio system functions can still
be controlled by standard buttons,
dials, and knobs, but some functions
can only be accessed using the
interface dial. The interface dial has
two parts, a dial and a selector.
Voice Control System
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
DIAL
ENTER
SELECTOR
The dial turns left and right. Use it to
make selections or adjustments to a
list or menu on the screen.
The selector can be pushed left,
right, up, down, and in. Use the
selector to scroll through lists, to
select menus, and to highlight menu
items. When you make a selection,
push the center of the selector
(ENTER) to go to that selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
318
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:16:44 31TK8600_324
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
FM
BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
PRESET
BUTTONS
PRESET
BUTTONS
AM
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INTERFACE DIAL
319
10/07/17 10:16:53 31TK8600_325
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To Play the FM/AM Radio
STEREO INDICATOR
BAND
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Press the AUDIO button to
view the audio control display. Turn
the system on by pressing the
power/volume knob, the AM, or FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are shown on
the display. To change bands, press
the AM/FM button. You can also
change bands by pushing the
interface selector up. Each time you
push it up, the band will change to
FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands,
STEREO will be shown on the
navigation screen and ST on the
center display, if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
On the AM band, AM noise
reduction turns on automatically.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the
preset buttons, and auto select.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
320
2011 Odyssey
TUNE
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency. To tune with the
interface dial, push the selector
down, and turn the knob to TUNE.
Then press ENTER on the selector,
and turn the knob to the desired
frequency. To exit the TUNE mode,
press ENTER on the selector.
10/07/17 10:16:58 31TK8600_326
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SKIP (SEEK) − The skip (seek)
function searches up and down from
the current frequency to find a
station with a strong signal. To
activate it, press either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar, then release it.
To scan with the interface dial, push
the interface selector down, and turn
the interface dial to select Scan, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
321
Features
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds a
strong signal, it will stop and play
that station for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
10/07/17 10:17:08 31TK8600_327
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button or
preset icon can store one frequency
on AM and two frequencies on FM.
A.SEL on the screen and the system
goes into auto select mode for
several seconds.
A.SEL INDICATOR
The system stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons (icons).
To store a preset memory location:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two sets of FM frequencies with
the preset buttons (on-screen
icons).
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Press the preset button, and hold
it until you hear a beep. You can
also store frequencies with the
interface dial. Select the preset
icon you want to store the
frequency on, then press ENTER
on the interface selector, and hold
it for more than 2 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
322
You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button (icon).
A.SEL
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling and can no longer receive
your preset stations, you can use the
auto select feature to find stations in
the local area.
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select ON, then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
You
will
see
I
nf
or
mat
i
onP
r
ovi
dedb
y:
2011 Odyssey
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons (icons) as previously
described.
To cancel auto select, select A.Sel on
the audio menu again and turn the
interface dial to select A.SEL OFF.
This restores the presets you
originally set.
10/07/17 10:17:15 31TK8600_328
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
For information on FM/AM radio
frequencies and reception, see
page 409 .
Radio Data System (RDS)
On the FM band, you can select a
favorite station and display the
program service name provided by
the radio data system (RDS).
RDS INFO Display
Features
The RDS INFO display function
shows the name of the station you
are listening to. With the audio
system on and the FM band selected,
you can turn this function on or off.
RDS INFO MESSAGE
To switch the RDS INFO display
function on and off, press and
release the TITLE button. With the
system on, you will see the ‘‘RDS
INFO ON’’ message briefly on the
center display. If the station you are
listening to is an RDS station, the
displayed frequency switches to the
station name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
323
10/07/17 10:17:26 31TK8600_329
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
If the station you are listening to is
not an RDS station, the audio screen
and the center display continue to
show the frequency.
Radio Data System (RDS) Category
When you turn off this function by
pressing the TITLE button, the
center display shows ‘‘RDS INFO
OFF.’’
RDS SEARCH
On the FM band selected, you can
select the program type provided by
the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to
display the radio information on the
screen. Push down the interface
selector, then turn the interface dial
to select RDS search. Press ENTER
to set your selection. The principal
RDS categories are shown as
follows:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
324
2011 Odyssey
ALL: All RDS category stations
ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft
rock music
COUNTRY: Country music
SOFT: Adult hits and soft music
TOP 40: Top 40 hits
OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies
R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft
rhythm and blues
RELIGION: Programs concerned
with religion
CLASSIC: Classical music
JAZZ: Jazz
INFO: News, information, sports,
talk shows, foreign language,
personality, public, college, and
weather
TRAFFIC: Traffic information
10/07/17 10:17:32 31TK8600_330
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
RDS Category Search
Turn the interface dial to select an
RDS category. You can use the
search or scan function to find radio
stations on the selected RDS
category by pressing the interface
selector to the left or the right. Press
ENTER to set your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking for
about 5 seconds, then the system
goes back to the last selected station.
Features
RDS CATEGORY
This function searches up and down
for strong signal frequencies that
carry the selected RDS category
information. This can help you to
find a station in your favorite
category. To activate it, press and
release either side (
or
) of
the SKIP bar. You will also see the
selected RDS category name
blinking in the center display while
searching it. When the system finds
a station, the selected RDS category
name will be displayed again for
about 10 seconds, and the system
stops searching.
CONTINUED
325
10/07/17 10:17:40 31TK8600_331
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or right to select SEEK up or
SEEK down in the upper right
corner of the screen. Press ENTER
to activate the RDS category search
(SEEK up/down).
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
a station that you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SEEK is selected.
To activate RDS category search
with the interface dial, push the
AUDIO button to display the FM
radio information on the screen.
Push the interface selector down,
and turn the interface dial to select
RDS search. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. The screen shows
you the RDS category list.
If the system does not find a station,
‘‘NOTHING’’ will blink for about 5
seconds on the navigation screen
and the display, and the system will
go back to the last selected station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
326
RDS Category SCAN
The scan function samples all
stations with strong signals on the
selected RDS category one by one.
You will also see the selected RDS
category name blinking in the
display while scanning it. When the
system finds one, it will stop and play
that station for about 10 seconds.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:17:47 31TK8600_332
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)
While the RDS category is selected,
move the interface selector to the
left or the right to select SCAN.
Then press ENTER to activate the
RDS SCAN.
Radio Text Display
This function displays the radio text
information of the selected RDS
station.
RDS CATEGORY LIST
SCAN is selected.
To activate RDS category scan with
the interface dial, push the AUDIO
button to display the FM radio
information on the screen. Push the
interface selector down, and turn the
interface dial to select RDS search
on the audio menu. Press ENTER on
the interface selector. The screen
shows you the RDS category list.
Turn the interface dial to the desired
RDS category.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
327
Features
If the selected RDS station has the
radio text information, you will see
the text indicator on the screen.
10/07/17 10:17:52 31TK8600_333
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
TEXT INDICATOR
READ RADIO TEXT
To activate radio text display, use
the interface dial. Push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to select Read Radio Text. Press
ENTER on the interface selector to
enter the setting.
The display shows up to 64
characters on the selected RDS
station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
328
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:18:00 31TK8600_334
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
These adjustments can be made with
the TUNE/SOUND knob or the
interface dial.
Features
Adjusting the Sound
BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and
FADER are each adjustable. You can
also adjust the strength of the sound
coming from the center and
subwoofer speakers. In addition, you
can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II
and Speed-sensitive volume
compensation (SVC).
SOUND SETUP
To adjust the sound, press the
AUDIO button, push the interface
selector down, and turn the interface
dial to Sound Setup. Then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Select the mode you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial then
press ENTER.
You can also adjust the sound by
turning the TUNE/SOUND knob.
Each mode is shown in the audio
display as it changes.
CONTINUED
329
10/07/17 10:18:05 31TK8600_335
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the TUNE/SOUND knob or
interface knob to adjust the setting
to your liking. You can check the
level on the navigation screen or on
the center display. When the level
reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’
in the center display.
The system will return to the audio
playing mode in the center display
about 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
If you do not make an adjustment
within 5 seconds, you will need to
select the mode again.
FADER/BALANCE − These
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
Fader adjusts the front-to-back
strength, while balance adjusts the
side-to-side strength. To adjust fader
and balance, select FADER or
BALANCE, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. To equalize the fader or
balance, turn the interface knob until
the marks on the sound grid come to
the center of the adjustment bar.
BASS/TREBLE − To adjust bass
and treble, select BASS or TREBLE,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The current setting is
shown on the display. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
330
2011 Odyssey
CENTER/SUBWOOFER − To
adjust the strength of the sound
from the center or subwoofer
speaker, select it and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface knob to the desired level,
and enter your selection by pressing
ENTER on the interface selector.
10/07/17 10:18:00 31TK8600_334
Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)
To set this feature on or off, select
Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on
the interface selector. Rotate the
interface dial to ON or OFF, and
press ENTER.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
NOTE: In some audio playing modes
(XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the
music coming from the rear
speakers may sound distorted. This
is due to compression of the music,
and it does not indicate a problem
with the setting.
Features
Dolby PL (ProLogic) II − Dolby
PL (ProLogic) II signal processing
creates multi-channel surround
sound from 2 channel stereo audio
sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only
be activated when listening to DISC
(CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM Radio,
and AUX. When ProLogic II is active,
‘‘PL II’’ is shown in the audio display.
The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. To change the SVC mode,
select SVC, then press ENTER on
the interface selector. The current
setting is shown on the screen. Turn
the interface knob to the desired
level, and enter your selection by
pressing ENTER on the interface
selector. If you feel the sound is too
loud, choose low. If you feel the
sound is too quiet, choose high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
331
10/07/17 10:18:19 31TK8600_337
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
XM
BUTTON
XM
BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
332
PRESET
BUTTONS
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INTERFACE DIAL
10/07/17 10:18:27 31TK8600_338
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
XM Radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM Radio
also allows you to view channel and
category selections in the audio
display.
Operating the XM Radio
Each time you push the interface
selector up, the band will change to
XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO
button to display XM information on
the screen. You can operate the XM
radio system with the interface dial.
Features
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM Radio anywhere in the United
States and Canada, except Hawaii,
Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a
registered trademark of Sirius XM
Radio , Inc. and XM CANADA is a
registered business name of
Canadian Satellite Radio Inc.
To listen to XM Radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the
button. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
Adjust the volume by turning the
power/volume knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
333
10/07/17 10:18:34 31TK8600_339
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
MODE − To switch between the
category mode and channel mode,
push the interface selector down to
display AUDIO MENU, then turn
the interface dial to select Mode, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select CH
or CAT, then press ENTER on the
interface selector. Move the
interface selector up to go back.
You can also switch the mode by
pressing the TITLE button for 3
seconds.
In the category mode, such as Jazz,
Rock, Classical, etc., you can
navigate through all of the channels
within that category. In the channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels.
Each time you press and release the
TITLE button, the center display
changes in the following sequence:
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL
NAME (channel name).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. You can also
change channels with the interface
selector, push down the interface
selector to choose TUNE and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface knob to the same directions.
In the category mode, you can only
select channels within that category.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
334
2011 Odyssey
CHANNEL LIST − Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel List and press
ENTER on the selector. Turn the
interface dial to select a channel,
then press ENTER to set your
selection.
CATEGORY (− or +) − Press
either side of the bar to select
another category.
10/07/17 10:18:43 31TK8600_340
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
Features
CHANNEL SCAN − This function
samples all channels. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Channel Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
XM BAND
CATEGORY SCAN − This
function samples the stations in the
selected category. Push down the
interface selector to select AUDIO
MENU, then turn the interface dial
to select Category Scan and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
button. Either
1. Press the
XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the
display.
CONTINUED
335
10/07/17 10:18:53 31TK8600_341
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
2. Use the tune, list, or scan function
to tune to a desired channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be
selected. In channel mode, all
channels can be selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the preset button until you hear a
beep. You can also pick the
number with the interface dial.
Select your desired number and
press and hold ENTER on the
interface selector.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
button or scroll
5. Press the
up again. The other XM band will
be shown. Store the next six
channels using steps 2 and 3.
Once a channel is stored, press
and release the proper preset
button to tune to it.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘UNAUTHORIZED’’ − The
encryption code is being updated.
Wait until the encryption code is
fully updated. Channels 0 and 1
should still work normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
336
2011 Odyssey
‘‘NO INFO’’ − The selected
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
‘‘CHECK ANTENNA’’ − There is
a problem with the XM antenna.
Please consult your dealer.
‘‘UNAVAILABLE’’ − The selected
channel number does not exist, is
not part of your subscription, or this
channel has no artist or title
information at this time.
10/07/17 10:19:02 31TK8600_342
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles
to the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Features
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND REPEATER
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
When DPLII is turned on (see page
331 ), sound coming from the rear
speakers may be distorted due to the
compression of the music being
broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this
happens.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
337
10/07/17 10:19:08 31TK8600_343
Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM Radio
reception.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Receiving XM Radio Service
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Radio. With the ignition
switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the
ON (II) position, push the power/
volume knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the
button.
A variety of music types and styles
will play.
If you decide to purchase XM Radio
service, contact XM Radio at
www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact
XM Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or at
1-877-209-0079. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
338
2011 Odyssey
After you have registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
XM Radio mode while you wait for
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. XM Radio
will continue to send an activation
signal to your vehicle for at least 12
hours from the activation request. If
the service has not been activated
after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
In Canada, contact XM CANADA .
10/07/17 10:19:18 31TK8600_344
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
CD
BUTTON
DISC
SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
With rear entertainment system
DISC SLOT
CD
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
DISC
SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE
DIAL
EJECT
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
INTERFACE
DIAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
2011 Odyssey
339
10/07/17 10:19:28 31TK8600_345
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
The disc packages or jackets should
have one of these marks.
The disc player can play these disc
formats:
CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT)
CD-R/RW
MP3/WMA
The disc player can also play CD-Rs
and CD-RWs compressed in MP3,
WMA or AAC formats.
NOTE:
If a file on WMA or AAC disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio
system skips to the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs will not
work in this unit.
Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed
discs are not playable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
340
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:19:33 31TK8600_346
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see
page 352 .
Features
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
To Load a Disc
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the
numbers of the current folder and
file are shown. The system will
continuously play a disc until you
change modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
341
10/07/17 10:19:37 31TK8600_347
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
Select the disc player by pressing the
CD button. The system will begin
playing the last selected track in the
disc. You will see the current track
position highlighted.
Title information will be displayed by
a list when the information is found
in the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on the
built-in hard disk drive. When you
play a CD recorded with text data,
you will see the genre, artist name,
album and track name on the screen.
When you play MP3/WMA/AAC
discs, you will see the folder name,
artist name, album name and track
name on the screen. If the disc was
not recorded with this information, it
will not be displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
342
2011 Odyssey
Each time you press the TITLE
button, the center display changes
from artist name to album name, to
track name and then to normal
display that shows the track number
and the elapsed time. When playing
a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the
display mode changes from folder
name, to file name, to artist tag, to
album tag, to track tag, and then to
normal display.
10/07/17 10:19:47 31TK8600_348
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To Change Tracks
Each time you press and release the
side of the skip bar, the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release the
side of the skip bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press the
side
again to skip to the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold either side of the skip bar.
To Choose a Track
When you insert a CD for the first
time, the system automatically starts
recording to the hard disc. For
information on recording from music
CDs, see page 357 .
TRACK LIST
TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR
Features
When you insert a CD for the first
time, a Gracenote notification
appears. For more information, see
page 380 .
Track Repeat
You can also choose a track directly
from a track list. If there are no track
names, you will see ‘‘No Title’’
displayed. Turn the interface dial to
select the desired track, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
REPEAT OFF ICON
TRACK REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
CONTINUED
343
10/07/17 10:19:54 31TK8600_349
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Random Play
TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This feature plays the tracks within a
disc in random order. When playing
MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all
the tracks within the disc are played
in random order, regardless of the
configuration of the folder.
Push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Random on
the AUDIO MENU, and press
ENTER on the
interface
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:selector.
344
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:20:03 31TK8600_350
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
Scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track on the
disc. When you return to disc mode,
the disc will begin playing from
where it left off.
Track Scan
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or the ignition
switch, play will continue at the same
point when you turn it back on.
The scan function samples all tracks
on the disc in the order they are
recorded on the disc.
To activate scan, press the SCAN
button, or push the interface selector
down while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
345
Features
SCAN ICON
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To take the system out of the disc
mode, press one of other source
buttons than the CD button.
10/07/17 10:20:09 31TK8600_351
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC Disc
The CD player can play CD-Rs and
CD-RWs compressed in MP3, WMA
or AAC formats. When playing a disc
in MP3, WMA or AAC, you will see
‘‘MP3,’’ ‘‘WMA’’ or ‘‘AAC’’ on the
center display and screen (if
selected). A disc can support more
than 99 folders, and each folder can
hold up to 255 playable files.
NOTE:
Combining a low sampling frequency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc,
use the disc controls previously
described, along with the following
information.
Depending on the software the files
were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or display
some text data.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
346
2011 Odyssey
Changing the Folders
Each time you press either side of
the bar, the folder title and its first
file’s information appear on the
center display. On the navigation
display, each time you press either
side of the bar, the system skips to
the previous or next folder on the
disc and displays a list of the
selected folder’s contents.
10/07/17 10:20:19 31TK8600_352
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
Folder Repeat
Changing and Selecting the Folders/
Files
FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
FILE LIST
FOLDER LIST
Using the interface selector, you can
see the list of all the folders within a
disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/
AAC disc, push the interface selector
up. The folder list in the currently
playing disc will appear on the screen.
If the root folder has some additional
folders in the lower layer, they will
be listed on the screen.
Select a desired folder by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
The screen will change to the file list.
Select a desired file and press
ENTER. The selected file begins to
play.
To change a file, turn the interface
dial to select a desired file, then
press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This feature, when activated, replays
all files on the selected folder in the
order they are compressed. To
activate folder repeat play, push the
interface selector down while playing
a disc. Turn the interface dial to
select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder repeat icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
CONTINUED
selector.
347
10/07/17 10:20:25 31TK8600_353
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Folder Random
FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
This feature, when activated, plays
all files in the current folder in
random order. To activate folder
random play, push the interface
selector down while playing a disc.
Turn the interface dial to select
Random on the AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the folder random icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
348
2011 Odyssey
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select OFF icon, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
10/07/17 10:20:32 31TK8600_354
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
10 seconds, and continues to sample
the remaining files.
File Scan
SCAN OFF ICON
FILE SCAN ICON
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This feature samples all files in the
selected folder in the order they are
stored. To activate this feature, press
the SCAN button. You can also
select the SCAN icon with the
interface dial. Push the selector
down, turn the dial to select Scan on
the AUDIO MENU, then press
ENTER. Turn the dial to select the
scan icon, then press ENTER. The
system begins to play a file for about
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
349
Features
To turn this feature off, press and
hold the SCAN button for more than
2 seconds, or turn the interface dial
to select the OFF icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Folder Scan
This feature, when activated,
samples the first file of each folder
for 10 seconds. To scan a folder,
press the SCAN button repeatedly.
Or, push the interface selector down
while playing a disc. Turn the
interface dial to select Scan on the
AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Turn the
interface dial to select the folder
scan icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
10/07/17 10:20:39 31TK8600_355
Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the next folders
for 10 seconds. After playing the first
file in the last folder, the system
plays normally.
Removing a Disc from the Player
To remove the disc, press the eject
(
) button.
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts
playing automatically.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
NOTE:
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from file scan to folder scan, then to
normal play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
350
2011 Odyssey
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 352 .
10/07/17 10:20:46 31TK8600_356
Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
center display while playing a disc.
Error Message
HEAT ERROR
For additional information on
damaged discs, see page 353 .
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
UNSUPPORTED
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL PUSH
EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S
MANUAL
High Temperature
Track/File format not
supported
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Solution
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 353). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
351
Features
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a disc,
press the eject button. After ejecting
the disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Cause
10/07/17 10:20:55 31TK8600_357
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality discs labeled for audio
use.
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
Play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
drive or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the disc player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
352
2011 Odyssey
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
10/07/17 10:21:07 31TK8600_358
Protecting Your Discs
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
With Plastic
Ring
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Burrs
CONTINUED
353
Features
Additional Information on
Recommended Discs
The in-dash disc player has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
10/07/17 10:21:17 31TK8600_359
Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
3-inch (8-cm) CD
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
This audio unit cannot play a Dualdisc .
Can Shape
Arrow Shape
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
354
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:21:25 31TK8600_360
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
Features
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
DISC
SLOT
With rear entertainment system
HDD
BUTTON
DISC
SLOT
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE
DIAL
HDD
BUTTON
CATEGORY
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
INTERFACE
DIAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
2011 Odyssey
355
10/07/17 10:21:33 31TK8600_361
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
function can record tracks from
music CDs to the navigation system’s
hard disc. This function also allows
for various playing methods, such as
playing recorded tracks on an artistby-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For
example, you can play the tracks that
you want to listen to in any order
that you like for each playlist.
NOTE:
Only recordings from a standard
CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo
PCM digital sound data) to HDD
are supported.
Music data recorded on HDD can
only be used for personal
enjoyment.
Data is recorded using ultraefficient compression technology,
therefore, sound quality may vary
slightly from the original.
Title information will be displayed
when the information is found in
the Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database) on
the built-in hard disk drive. See
page 380 .
Digital music files, such as MP3,
WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R
and USB flash memory devices
cannot be copied to HDD.
Likewise, digital music files
recorded to HDD cannot be copied
to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all data
will be lost and stored music will not
be recovered.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
356
Recording function from following
media is not supported.
−CD-DA which prohibits the
copying by SCMS
−CD-DA with copy control
−SACD (Super Audio CD)
−DTS-CD
−DVD-A
−CD-R/RW
−DVD-R/RW
−Copy controlled CDs (Playback
cannot be guaranteed)
−DTS-CDs (Only enabled for
playback)
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:21:46 31TK8600_362
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Playlists
Playlists are track lists in a certain
playback group.
User Playlist
The HDD has six playlist folders for
user customizing. Each playlist can
be edited by the user, and will store
up to 999 songs. For more
information on how to edit the user
playlist, see page 369 .
There are six categories:
Album record date: Album titles are
arranged by date of recording.
Album: Album names are arranged
in alphabetical order.
Artist: Artist names are arranged in
alphabetical order.
Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.
Playlist: Any of six playlists that are
arranged by the user.
Track: Track titles are arranged in
alphabetical order.
For more information of how to
search a music, see page 364 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Recording a Music CD to HDD
Audio
If you play a music CD that has not
yet been recorded on the HDD, the
system will automatically begin
recording to the HDD once the disc
is loaded. To turn this feature off,
see page 359 .
CONTINUED
357
Features
Original Playlist
This playlist is automatically
generated when the music CD is
recorded. The maximum number
of original playlists that can be
stored to the HDD is 999, with 99
songs on each playlist. Each album
name on the music CD is counted
as a playlist.
Track Search Methods
Songs that have been recorded on
the HDD are categorized in groups
for easy searching.
10/07/17 10:21:55 31TK8600_363
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
REC DONE ICON
NOTE:
Please note that there will be no
compensation offered in the case
of unsuccessful recording of audio
data or the loss of audio data due
to any cause whatsoever.
During recording, operation of this
product may be slower.
REC READY ICON
REC ICON
The icons show the recording
conditions for each track:
Rec icon: Now recording
Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded
Rec done icon: Recording finished
If you stop the engine or the
power system is turned off while
recording a CD, there may be
pauses between songs when you
play back from the HDD.
Tracks from music CDs are
recorded at four times the
playback speed. You can listen to
tracks as they are being recorded.
Forward/rewind, repeat, random
and scan functions are not
available during recording.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
358
2011 Odyssey
You can listen to tracks from other
playlists that have already been
recorded while recording. Press
the HDD button and switch over
to HDD Audio.
With the factory settings, all of the
songs on a music CD are
automatically recorded.
Recording settings cannot be
changed during recording.
If the number of songs in the
playlist exceeds 999, the oldest
song will be overwritten each time
you add a new song.
10/07/17 10:22:04 31TK8600_364
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Cancel Recording a Music CD
to HDD
In order to suspend recording, push
the interface selector down, select
Cancel CD Recording, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Changing the Recording Settings
Recording a Track on a Music CD
Manually
Features
CD Recording
HDD SETUP
To change the setting to manual
mode, push the interface selector
down on the HDD screen. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup
and press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
MANUAL and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
Push down the interface selector to
go back to the audio screen.
CONTINUED
359
10/07/17 10:22:12 31TK8600_365
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To Record a Track Manually
Recording All of the Tracks on a
Music CD Automatically
To change the setting to
automatically record all of the tracks
on a music CD, move the interface
selector down on the HDD Audio
screen. Turn the interface dial to
select HDD Setup, and press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Record CD
Select a track to record from the
music CD, push the HDD button,
then push the interface selector
down to display the audio menu.
Turn the interface dial to select
Record CD, and then press ENTER
on the interface selector.
Turn the dial to select CD Recording
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select
AUTO, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
360
2011 Odyssey
Playing Tracks on HDD
To play tracks on HDD, push the
HDD button until the HDD Audio
screen appears. Playback will start
automatically with the track
previously selected.
10/07/17 10:22:23 31TK8600_366
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing a Track/Tracklist
To change a track or tracklist*, press
on the Category bar or the Skip bar.
Category Bar
−
* : The tracklist has six search
mode categories: album, artist,
track, playlist, genre, and album
record date. Within the selected
category, the tracklist will be
changed with the category bar.
Repeat Playback
Returns to the beginning of the
song that is being played.
Otherwise, the previous track is
selected. If you press this bar
during the first song, the last song
is selected.
The next song is selected. If you
press this bar during the last song,
the first song is selected.
Fast Forwarding and Rewinding
To fast forward, press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar. To
rewind, press and hold the
side
of the SKIP bar.
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
+
The next tracklist is selected.
If you press + during the last
tracklist, the first tracklist is
selected.
The previous tracklist is selected.
If you press − during the first
tracklist, the last tracklist is
selected.
Skip Bar
REPEAT ICON
To replay the current track
continuously, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the interface dial to
select the repeat icon, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
361
10/07/17 10:22:29 31TK8600_367
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Random Playback
RANDOM OFF ICON
Turn the interface dial to select the
track random icon, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector.
RANDOM ICON
This function plays tracks in the
current search mode in random
order. To activate random play, push
the interface selector down during
track playback. Turn the interface
dial to select Random on the HDD
AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on
the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
362
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:22:38 31TK8600_368
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Turn the interface dial to select the
scan icon. Press ENTER on the
interface selector. You will hear a 10second sampling of each track in the
current search mode.
Scan Playback
SCAN OFF ICON
SCAN ICON
This function samples the tracks in
the current search mode in the order
that they were recorded.
To turn this feature off, press the
SCAN button again, or turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector. The system begins to play
the last track sampled.
To activate scan, push the interface
selector down during track playback.
Turn the interface dial to select Scan
on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
363
Features
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel. Press and release the SCAN
button.
Making an User Playlist
The HDD has two types of the
playlists: original playlist and user
playlist. On the original playlist, the
music CD is recorded automatically
when it is played. In addition, you
can create up to six user playlists on
the HDD. In each playlist, you can
store a desired music data from the
original playlists or music CDs.
10/07/17 10:22:45 31TK8600_369
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching the Music
While playing music in the HDD
playback screen, push the interface
selector up to select MUSIC
SEARCH. You can search a track by
album, artist, track, playlist, genre,
or album record date, or you can
shuffle all tracks.
Adding a Track to an Original/User
Playlist
While a track is playing on an
Original Playlist or User Playlist
Playback screen, push the interface
selector down. Turn the interface
dial and select Add to Playlist, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
On the Playlist screen, turn the
interface dial and select the Playlist
to which the song is to be added,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will be returned to the
Playback screen.
After storing music data, you can
customize the original and user
playlists (see page 369 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
364
2011 Odyssey
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
10/07/17 10:22:54 31TK8600_370
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Album
ALPHABET TAG
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
Features
Push the selector down.
RANDOM ALL TRACKS
Shuffles the playback of all tracks
that have been recorded on HDD.
To shuffle all tracks, push the
interface selector up to display the
‘‘Search music by’’ screen, and then
push the interface selector down.
Shuffled playback begins.
Push the interface selector up to
display the ‘‘Search music by’’ screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Albums.’’ Press ENTER on the
selector, and the album list will be
displayed in alphabetical order.
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
365
10/07/17 10:23:01 31TK8600_371
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Artist
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Track
Turn the interface dial to select the
artist you want to listen to, and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The first track on the selected artist
begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Artists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the artist list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Tracks.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the track list
will be displayed in alphabetical
order.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
366
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:23:08 31TK8600_372
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
If you push the interface selector
right or left, you can change the
alphabet tag.
Searching Music by Playlists
Turn the interface dial to select a
track you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
playlist you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
The first track on the selected
playlist begins to play.
Features
The selected track begins to play.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Playlists.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector then the playlist
will be displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
367
10/07/17 10:23:16 31TK8600_373
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Searching Music by Genre
The first track on the selected genre
begins to play.
Searching Music by Album
Record Date
RECORDED DATE
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Genres.’’ Press ENTER on the
interface selector, and the genre list
will be displayed.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Search music by screen,
and turn the interface dial to select
Album Record Date. Press ENTER
on the interface selector. The album
list will be displayed.
Turn the interface dial to select the
genre you want to listen to, and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
Turn the interface dial to select the
album you want to listen to, then
press ENTER on the selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
368
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:23:24 31TK8600_374
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
The first track on the selected album
begins to play.
You cannot change the artist name,
original play list name (album name),
track name, and music genre unless
you change them on the original play
list.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Changing the Order of Tracks of the
Original Playlist or User Playlist
1. On the HDD audio screen, push
up the interface selector to select
MUSIC SEARCH. Select Albums
or Playlists by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
the album list or the playlist, then
press ENTER.
3. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU for
the playlist.
CONTINUED
369
Features
Customizing Original/User
Playlist
After storing the data, you can
change some items: name of an artist,
play list name, track title, music
genre, order of the tracks on the
original/user playlist. You can also
delete the track or the album from
the playlist.
10/07/17 10:23:31 31TK8600_375
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
7. Turn the interface dial to select
where the track is to be moved,
then press ENTER on the
interface selector.
8. Push the interface selector down
to return to the Edit Music Info.
screen.
9. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
4. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
5. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Track Order, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
6. Turn the interface dial to select
the track to be moved, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
370
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:23:40 31TK8600_376
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Artist Name of the
Original Playlist
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Artist Name, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit an artist name’’
screen, input the new artist name.
Select a letter by turning the
interface dial, then press ENTER.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
371
10/07/17 10:23:47 31TK8600_377
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
7. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
8. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
6. The ‘‘Select an edit option’’ screen
is displayed. Choose if you would
like to apply the new name to both
the album artist and/or the track
artist. Select your edit option by
turning the dial, then press
ENTER.
1. Select a desired playlist to change
the user playlist name, or a desired
album to change the original
playlist name (album name). Refer
to the Music Search function on
page 364 for how to select a
playlist or an album. Push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU for a selected
playlist or album.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
372
Changing the Name of the Original
Playlist or User Playlist
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:23:56 31TK8600_378
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Track Name of the
Original Playlist
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist
Name to edit user playlist), then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit an album name’’
screen, input the new Original
Playlist name or User Playlist
name.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
6. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
7. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
returns to Ithe
playlist.
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
373
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
10/07/17 10:24:05 31TK8600_379
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Changing the Musical Genre
1. While a track is playing on an
‘‘Original Playlist Playback’’ screen,
push the interface selector down.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial to select
Edit Track Name, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
4. On the ‘‘Edit a track name’’ screen,
input the new track name.
5. After inputting the name, push the
interface selector down to select
OK.
6. You will be returned to the ‘‘Edit
music Info.’’ screen.
7. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to Ithe
playlist.
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
374
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:24:11 31TK8600_380
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. Turn the interface dial on the
‘‘Select a genre’’ screen to select
the Original Playlist that you want
to change the genre and then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You will be returned to
the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
Edit Genre, then press ENTER on
the interface selector in ‘‘Select a
genre’’ screen.
4. On the ‘‘Select a genre’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
genre, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
375
Features
6. Push the CANCEL button or the
AUDIO button. The screen
returns to the playlist.
10/07/17 10:24:19 31TK8600_381
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting an Album or Playlist
1. On the HDD playback screen of
the album in which you want to
delete, push the interface selector
down to display the AUDIO
MENU.
NOTE:
When you delete the Original
Playlist, any tracks stored in a
User Playlist are also deleted.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
Delete Album (or Delete Playlist),
then press ENTER.
4. The Confirmation is displayed.
Select OK and then press ENTER.
You will be returned to the
playback screen for the Original
Playlist or User Playlist.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
376
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:24:26 31TK8600_382
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Deleting a Track
1. Select the track with the interface
dial from the playback screen
while it is playing. Push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
NOTE:
When you delete a track from the
Original Playlist, the track is also
deleted from the User Playlist in
which the deleted track was
stored.
Even if all the tracks are deleted
from the User Playlist, the data
folder for that playlist cannot be
deleted, and their names (playlist
and artist) are left. You can store
tracks again on that playlist.
3. The ‘‘Edit music Info.’’ screen is
displayed. Select Delete Track and
press ENTER.
4. Select OK to confirm you want to
delete the track. You will be
returned to the Playback screen
for the Original Playlist or User
Playlist.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
377
Features
2. Turn the interface dial and select
‘‘Edit Music Info.,’’ then press
ENTER.
10/07/17 10:24:37 31TK8600_383
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Acquiring Title Information
1. Push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
Checking HDD Audio Capacity
MAXIMUM CAPACITY
REMAINING CAPACITY
2. Turn the interface dial and select
Get Music Info., then press
ENTER.
3. On the ‘‘Select an Album’’ screen,
turn the interface dial and select
the title information for the
Original Playlist, then press
ENTER. You will be returned to
the ‘‘Audio Menu’’ screen.
NOTE:
Consult your dealer, or visit
www.honda.com (in U.S.), or
www.honda.ca (in Canada), to acquire
updated files.
VERSION
You can check the HDD Audio
capacity and remaining space as well
as the Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB) version included
with the navigation system on the
HDD Setup screen.
To check the HDD audio capacity,
push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the
interface dial to select HDD Setup,
then press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
378
Updating Gracenote Album Info
(Gracenote Media Database)
You can update the Gracenote
Album Info (Gracenote Media
Database) that is included with the
navigation system.
2011 Odyssey
1. Insert the update disc into the disc
slot, or connect the USB flash
memory device that includes the
update.
10/07/17 10:24:50 31TK8600_384
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
4. Turn the interface dial and select
Gracenote Info. Update, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector.
6. Turn the dial to select Yes on the
confirmation screen, and the
update will start.
2. Push the interface selector down
to select AUDIO MENU in the
HDD playback screen or CD
playback screen.
3. Turn the interface dial to select
HDD Setup, then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
1. Press the INFO button, rotate the
interface dial to select ‘‘Set up,’’
and press ENTER.
2. Move the interface selector to the
right to navigate to the ‘‘Set up
(Other)’’ screen.
7. Turn the interface dial to select
OK on the confirmation screen.
3. On the ‘‘Set up (Other)’’ screen,
rotate the interface dial to select
‘‘Clear Personal Data,’’ and press
ENTER.
8. After updating is complete, press
ENTER on the confirmation
screen.
4. Select the item you wish to delete.
NOTE:
Once you perform an update, any
information you edited before will be
overwritten.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
379
Features
5. Turn the dial to select USB or
DISC on the Update Gracenote by
screen, then press ENTER on the
selector.
Clearing the HDD
Any music, data, calendar entries,
etc. that have been stored on the
HDD can be deleted.
10/07/17 10:24:59 31TK8600_385
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
5. A pop-up screen verifying whether
the deletion is to be continued or
not will be displayed. Select Yes to
delete, or No to cancel.
6. A second confirmation will appear.
Select Yes to delete, or No to
cancel.
7. When you are finished deleting
the data, press the interface
selector down to select ‘‘Done.’’
NOTE: If you select ‘‘Music on HDD,’’
the system will automatically restart
after deletion.
Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music
recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more
information, please visit http://www.
gracenote.com/.
When music is recorded to the HDD
from a CD, information such as the
recording artist and track name are
retrieved from the Gracenote
Database and displayed (when
available). Gracenote may not
contain information for all albums.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
380
2011 Odyssey
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist,
album, and track information from
CDs to display on the HDD. More
information about Gracenote is
available at www.honda.com (in U.S.)
or www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000−
2010 Gracenote.
10/07/17 10:25:07 31TK8600_386
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the ‘‘Powered by Gracenote’’ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote End User License
Agreement
Version 20061005
This application or device contains
software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (‘‘Gracenote’’).
The software from Gracenote (the
‘‘Gracenote Software’’) enables this
application to perform disc and/or
file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name,
artist, track, and title information
(‘‘Gracenote Data’’) from online
servers or embedded databases
(collectively, ‘‘Gracenote Servers’’)
and to perform other functions. You
may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or
device.
You agree that you will use
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial
use only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
You agree not to assign, copy,
transfer or transmit the Gracenote
Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive
license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to
cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers.
CONTINUED
381
Features
Gracenote Software, copyright 2000
−2010 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents: ♯
5,987,525; ♯6,061,680; ♯6,154,773,
♯6,161,132, ♯6,230,192, ♯6,230,207,
♯6,240,459, ♯6,330,593, and other
patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: ♯
6,304,523.
10/07/17 10:25:12 31TK8600_387
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)
Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights. Under
no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to
you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote,
Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a
randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote
service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each
item of Gracenote Data are licensed
to you ‘‘AS IS.’’
382
Gracenote makes no representations
or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any
Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to
change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide
you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that
Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its services
at any time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE
DOES NOT WARRANT THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.
IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Gracenote 2010
10/07/17 10:25:20 31TK8600_388
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
ALBUM ART
AUDIO SCREEN
Features
USB INDICATOR
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INTERFACE DIAL
383
10/07/17 10:25:28 31TK8600_389
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Play an iPod
This audio system can select and
play the audio files on the iPod with
the same controls used for the indash disc player. To play an iPod,
connect it to the USB adapter cable
in the glove box by using your dock
connector, then press the USB/AUX
button. The ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position. The iPod will also be
charged with the ignition switch in
these settings.
The audio system reads and plays
playable sound files on the iPod. The
system cannot operate an iPod as a
mass storage device. The system will
only play songs stored on the iPod
with iTunes.
iPod and iTunes are registered
trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons.
The audio system, including the
music search feature Song By
VoiceTM, can be operated by voice
control. See the navigation system
manual for complete details.
iPods compatible with your audio
system using the USB adapter cable
are:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
384
2011 Odyssey
Model
iPod 5th and 6th
generations
iPod classic
iPod nano
1st generation
iPod nano
2nd generation
iPod nano
3rd generation
iPod nano
4th generation
iPod nano
5th generation
iPod touch
1st generation
iPod touch
2nd generation
iPod touch
3rd generation
iPhone
iPhone 3G
iPhone 3GS
Software
Ver. 1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.2 or more
Ver. 1.3.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.1.3 or more
Ver. 1.0.4 or more
Ver. 1.0.1 or more
Ver. 1.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.2.1 or more
Ver. 3.1.1 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 2.1.0 or more
Ver. 5.12.1 or more
10/07/17 10:25:38 31TK8600_390
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
Use only compatible iPods with the
latest software. iPods that are not
compatible will not work in this audio
unit.
Connecting an iPod
DOCK CONNECTOR
Do not keep the iPod and dock
connector cable in the vehicle.
Direct sunlight and high heat will
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable
between the USB adapter cable
equipped with your vehicle and
your dock connector.
Features
NOTE:
Do not connect your iPod using a
hub.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Open the glove box, and unclip the
USB adapter cable.
2. Connect your dock connector to
the iPod correctly and securely.
3. Install the dock connector to the
USB adapter cable securely.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing it.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
385
10/07/17 10:25:47 31TK8600_391
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If the iPod indicator does not appear
in the audio display, check the
connections, and try to reconnect the
iPod a few times.
If the audio system still does not
recognize the iPod, the iPod may
need to be reset. Follow the
instructions that came with your
iPod, or you can find reset
instructions online at
www.apple.com/itunes/
The current file number and total of
the selected playable files are
displayed in the center display.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the artist, album and track (file)
names on the navigation screen.
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is
playing to select passages and
change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the
side of the bar
to skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within playing track,
press and hold either side (
or
) of the SKIP bar.
Push the interface selector up to
display the Music Search screen.
Turn the interface dial to select a
desired search method.
If a file on your iPod has an album
art, it will be shown in the display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
386
You can also select a track from any
category on the list: Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers
and Podcasts by using the interface
dial.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:25:54 31TK8600_392
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the artists list,
the albums list is displayed.
Push the interface selector down to
‘‘PLAY ALL’’ on any list. All available
files on the selected list are played.
Press ENTER on the interface
selector to display the items on that
list, then turn the interface dial to
make a selection. Press ENTER to
set your selection.
If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on the albums
list, all the tracks become available
for selection.
The track order that appears at this
time varies depending on the iPod
model and software.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
387
Features
Press the AUDIO button to go back
to the normal audio playing display.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen, and
pressing the MAP/GUIDE button
cancels the audio control display on
the screen.
10/07/17 10:26:03 31TK8600_393
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
REPEAT
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Repeat icon and press ENTER.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
SHUFFLE ICON
SHUFFLE − This feature shuffles
playback of tracks contained within
the iPod. This function can be
established at the same time that
Repeat Playback is set up.
REPEAT − This feature
continuously plays a file.
1. Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control screen, then
push the interface selector down
to display the AUDIO MENU.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Repeat, and press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
388
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:26:13 31TK8600_394
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Shuffle icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Album Shuffle icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Shuffle playback of the album will
begin.
Shuffle playback will begin. To
cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON
ALBUM SHUFFLE − Shuffles
playback of all available albums,
which are selected by the desired
list: playlists, artists, albums or songs.
This function can be selected at the
same time that Repeat Playback is
setup.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Shuffle
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
NOTE:
Available operating functions vary on
models or versions. Some functions
may not be available on the vehicle’s
audio system.
1. On the iPod screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
389
Features
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Shuffle and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
10/07/17 10:26:20 31TK8600_395
Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing Your iPod
To take the system out of the iPod
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to select
it.
* : The displayed message may
vary on models or versions. On
some models, there is no
message to disconnect.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same iPod, the
system may begin playing where it
left off, depending on what mode the
iPod is in when it is reconnected.
When you disconnect the iPod while
it is playing, the audio screen (if
selected) shows NO DATA.
Disconnecting an iPod
You can disconnect the iPod at any
time when you see the ‘‘OK to
disconnect’’ message* in the iPod
display. Always make sure you see
‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message in the
iPod display before you disconnect it.
Make sure to follow the iPod’s
instructions on how to disconnect
the dock connector from the USB
adapter cable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
390
2011 Odyssey
When you connect your iPod to the
navigation system, the most recent
settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be
carried over.
10/07/17 10:26:24 31TK8600_396
iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing an iPod,
find the solution in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message
UNSUPPORTED
CONNECT RETRY
iPod NO SONG
Solution
Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.
Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated.
Appears when there are no files in the iPod.
Features
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
391
10/07/17 10:26:32 31TK8600_397
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
392
POWER/
VOLUME
KNOB
CATEGORY
BAR
SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INTERFACE DIAL
10/07/17 10:26:40 31TK8600_398
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
The audio system reads and plays
the audio files on the USB flash
memory device in MP3, WMA or
AAC* formats. The USB flash
memory device limit is up to 700
folders or up to 15000 files.
* : Only AAC format files recorded
with iTunes are playable on this
audio unit.
The recommended USB flash
memory devices are 256 MB or
higher, and formatted with the FAT
file system. Some digital audio
players may be compatible as well.
Some USB flash memory devices
(such as devices with security lockout features, etc.) will not work in
this audio unit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
NOTE:
Do not use a device such as a card
reader or hard drive as it or your
files may be damaged.
Do not connect your USB flash
memory device using a hub.
Do not use an extension cable to
the USB adapter cable equipped
with your vehicle.
CONTINUED
393
Features
To Play a USB Flash Memory
Device
This audio system can select and
play the audio files from a USB flash
memory device with the same
controls used for the in-dash disc
player. To play a USB flash memory
device, connect it to the USB adapter
cable in the glove box, then press the
USB/AUX button. The ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
10/07/17 10:26:49 31TK8600_399
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
Do not keep a USB flash memory
device in the vehicle. Direct
sunlight and high heat will damage
it.
We recommend backing up your
data before playing a USB flash
memory device.
Depending on the type and
number of files, it may take some
time before they begin to play.
Depending on the software the
files were made with, it may not be
possible to play some files, or
display some text data.
Some devices cannot be powered
or charged via the USB adapter. If
this is the case, use the accessory
adapter to supply power to your
device.
The order of files in USB playback
may be different from the order of
files displayed in PC or other
devices etc. Files are played in the
order stored in USB flash memory
device.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
Depending on the type of
encoding and writing software
used, there may be cases where
character information does not
display properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
394
2011 Odyssey
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or
AAC format may not be supported. If
an unsupported file is found, the
audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,
then skips to the next file.
10/07/17 10:26:56 31TK8600_400
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
In WMA or AAC format, DRM
(digital rights management) files
cannot be played. If the system finds
a DRM file, the audio unit displays
UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips
to the next file.
Connecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
Features
Combining a low sampling f requency
with a low bitrate may result in
extremely degraded sound quality.
USB ADAPTER CABLE
USB ADAPTER CABLE
1. Open the glove box, and unclip the
USB adapter cable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
2. Connect the USB flash memory
device to the USB adapter cable
correctly and securely.
CONTINUED
395
10/07/17 10:27:03 31TK8600_401
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
When the USB device is connected
and the USB mode is selected on the
audio system, the USB indicator is
shown in the center display. It also
shows the folder and file numbers.
Pressing the AUDIO button displays
the USB indicator, the folder and file
names, and the elapsed time in the
navigation screen.
To Change or Select Files
Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash
memory device is playing to select
passages and change files.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release the
side of the SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next file. Press and
release the
side of the bar, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current file. Press it twice to skip
to the beginning of the previous file.
To move rapidly within a file, press
and hold either side (
or
)
of the SKIP bar.
Folder Selection − To select a
different folder, press and release
either side of the CATEGORY bar.
Press the + side to skip to the next
folder, and press the − side to skip
to the beginning of the previous
folder.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
396
To Select a File from Folder and File
Lists
2011 Odyssey
You can also select a folder or file
from the list by using the interface
dial. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display on the
navigation screen. Use the interface
dial to highlight the file, then press
ENTER to set your selection.
10/07/17 10:27:13 31TK8600_402
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To go back to the normal playing
display, press the AUDIO button.
Pressing the CANCEL button goes
back to the previous screen and
pressing the MAP button cancels the
audio mode display.
TRACK REPEAT
REPEAT OFF ICON
Features
To Select Repeat, Random or Scan
Mode:
Push the interface selector down to
display the AUDIO MENU.
Push the selector up to display the
‘‘Select a folder’’ screen. Then turn
the interface dial to select a folder,
and press ENTER.
If you have more than one layer of
folders (folders within folders), you
can also see each folder on the
screen.
You can select any type of repeat,
random or scan mode on the audio
menu screen.
Move the interface selector up to
select BACK to show the USB
screen, or press the CANCEL button
to return to the previous screen.
TRACK REPEAT ICON
This function repeats playback of the
track.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
397
10/07/17 10:27:22 31TK8600_403
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Track Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the track that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
FOLDER REPEAT
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER.
Pressing either side of the SKIP bar
also cancels this function.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Repeat
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER REPEAT ICON
This function replays all the tracks in
a folder in the order that they were
stored.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial to select
Repeat and press ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
398
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Repeat icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
Playback of the folder that is
currently being played will be
repeated.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:27:33 31TK8600_404
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
TRACK RANDOM
RANDOM OFF ICON
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Track Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The tracks are played in random
order.
FOLDER RANDOM
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
FOLDER RANDOM ICON
TRACK RANDOM ICON
This function plays all the tracks on
the USB flash memory device in
random order.
This function plays all of the tracks
in the current folder in random order.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
2. Turn the interface dial, select
Random and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
399
10/07/17 10:27:43 31TK8600_405
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select the
Folder Random icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The files are played in random
order.
TRACK SCAN
SCAN OFF ICON
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Random
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
When you want to use this function
to another folder (not the folder that
is currently played), you can select
the folder to be played in random
order as following:
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector up to display the
folder list screen.
2. Push the interface selector down
to ‘‘RANDOM ALL TRACKS’’ on
the folder list screen. All available
files in the selected folder are
played in random order.
This function samples all the tracks
in the current folder in the order that
they were recorded.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
Turn the interface dial and
highlight the folder you want to
change to.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
400
TRACK SCAN ICON
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:27:52 31TK8600_406
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Track Scan icon and press ENTER
on the interface selector. Each
track or file is sampled for 10
seconds. When all the tracks in
the folder have been scanned,
regular playback is resumed.
The first file of the first folder is
sampled for 10 seconds. If no other
operations are carried out, the first
files of the remaining folders are
played for 10 seconds. After the first
file of the last folder is played back,
regular playback is resumed.
FOLDER SCAN ICON
This function samples the first file in
each folder within the USB flash
memory device.
1. On the USB main screen, push the
interface selector down to display
the AUDIO MENU.
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector.
You can also select the scan feature
with the SCAN button on the control
panel. Press and release the SCAN
button.
2. Turn the interface dial, select the
Scan icon and press ENTER on
the interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
401
Features
To cancel this function, turn the
interface dial and select the Scan
OFF icon, and then press ENTER on
the interface selector to play the last
track sampled.
3. Turn the interface dial, select
Folder Scan icon and press
ENTER on the interface selector.
FOLDER SCAN
10/07/17 10:27:58 31TK8600_407
Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a USB Flash
Memory Device
To take the system out of the USB
mode, press one of the other source
buttons than the USB/AUX button.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the auxiliary input jack,
press the USB/AUX button to
select it.
Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory
Device
You can disconnect the USB flash
memory device at any time even if
the USB mode is selected on the
audio system. Always follow the USB
flash memory device’s instructions
when you remove it.
You can also press the MODE
button on the steering wheel to
change modes.
If you reconnect the same USB flash
memory device, the system will
begin playing where it left off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
402
2011 Odyssey
When you disconnect the USB flash
memory device while it is playing,
the center display and the audio
screen (if selected) show NO DATA.
10/07/17 10:28:03 31TK8600_408
USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
center display while playing a USB
flash memory device, find the
solution in the chart to the right. If
you cannot clear the error message,
take your vehicle to your dealer.
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
UNPLAYABLE FILE
USB NO SONG
Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.
Appears when the file is copyright protected, such as DRM.
Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory
device.
Appears when the overcurrent protection feature of the system stops
supplying power to USB because an incompatible device is connected.
Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off, and turn it on
again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
BAD USB DEVICE
PLEASE CHECK
OWNER’S MANUAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
403
Features
Error Message
10/07/17 10:28:10 31TK8600_409
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
AUDIO SCREEN
CENTER DISPLAY
Without rear entertainment system
With rear entertainment system
USB/AUX
BUTTON
USB/AUX
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
TITLE
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
AUDIO
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
INTERFACE DIAL
404
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
INTERFACE DIAL
10/07/17 10:28:19 31TK8600_410
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones
with streaming audio capabilities are
compatible with the system. You can
find an approved phone by visiting
handsfreelink.honda.com or call
(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit
www.handsfreelink.ca , or call
(888) 528-7876.
NOTE: In some states, provinces,
and territories, it may be illegal to
perform some data device functions
while driving.
To Play Bluetooth Audio Files
Make sure that your phone is paired
and linked to HFL.
To begin to play the audio files, you
may need to operate your phone. If
so, follow the phone maker’s
operating instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Press the USB/AUX button*. When
the phone is recognized, you will see
the Bluetooth Audio message on the
center display and the screen (if
selected), and the system begins to
play.
*: If an iPod or USB flash memory
device or audio unit connected
to the auxiliary input jack was
selected at the last mode, you
will see iPod, USB or AUX in the
center display and the audio
control display on the navigation
screen (if selected). Push the
USB/AUX button again to play
audio files from your Bluetooth
Audio phone.
CONTINUED
405
Features
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Bluetooth Audio system, which
allows you to listen to streaming
audio from your Bluetooth Audio
compatible phone. This function is
only available on phones that are
paired and linked to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
system (see page 522 ).
10/07/19 15:53:57 31TK8600_411
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Once a device is linked, the name of
the device will appear on the screen.
Pressing the TITLE button switches
the center display between the
Bluetooth Audio and the device
name.
In the following conditions, the
display shows ‘‘NO CONNECT’’
message after pressing the TITLE
button.
Voice Control System
You can select the AUX mode by
using the voice control buttons, but
cannot operate the play mode
functions.
The phone is not linked to HFL.
To skip a file
If more than one phone is paired to
the HFL system, there will be a
delay before the system begins to
play.
NOTE: The text display function
may not be available on some phone
devices.
The phone is not turned on.
The phone is not in the vehicle.
Another HFL compatible phone,
which is not compatible for
Bluetooth Audio, is already
connected.
If your Bluetooth Audio compatible
phone does not operate as described,
make sure it is a Honda approved
phone. To find out if your phone is
approved, go to handsfreelink.honda.
com (in Canada, www.handsfreelink.ca),
or call the HandsFreeLink
consumer support at 888-528-7876.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
406
2011 Odyssey
Press the
side of the SKIP bar
to skip forward to the next file, and
press the
side to skip backward
to the beginning of the current file.
Push the
side again to skip to
the previous file.
NOTE: The skip function may not be
available on some phone devices.
10/07/17 10:28:36 31TK8600_412
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
To pause or resume a file
To change sound settings
Features
Turn the interface dial to switch the
setting between the resume/pause
mode and the sound setup mode.
Select Resume/Pause, then press
ENTER to set your selection. Each
time you press ENTER, the system
switches between the resume mode
and pause mode.
NOTE: The pause function may not
be available on some phone devices.
The resume/pause mode can stop
playing a file temporarily.
Press the AUDIO button to display
the audio control display. Turn the
dial to switch the setting between
the resume/pause mode and the
sound setup mode. Select Sound
Setup, then press ENTER to set your
selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
407
10/07/17 10:28:45 31TK8600_413
Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)
Turn the dial to select a sound setup
mode, then press ENTER to set your
selection. See page 329 for more
sound setting information.
To switch to HFL mode
If you receive a call when the
Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel. The screen and the center
display switch to the HFL mode (see
page 517 ).
To turn off the Bluetooth Audio
mode
To take the system out of the
Bluetooth Audio mode, press one of
the other source buttons than the
USB/AUX button. When a
compatible audio unit is connected to
the auxiliary input jack, press the
USB/AUX button to select it.
Switching to another mode pauses
the music playing from your phone.
After ending the call, press the
HANG-UP button to go back to the
Bluetooth Audio mode.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
408
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:28:54 31TK8600_414
FM/AM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Features
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
CONTINUED
409
10/07/17 10:29:00 31TK8600_415
FM/AM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
410
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources
(such as garages or parking
structures) can cause temporary
reception problems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:29:09 31TK8600_416
Remote Audio Controls
The MODE button changes the
mode.
MODE BUTTON
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles without navigation system
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
On all models except LX
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. They let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the steering wheel.
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all present,
connected media sources. Media
sources that are not present or
connected will not appear when
cycling with the MODE button.
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
(+) of the CH button. Press the
bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the upper display.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
411
Features
Pressing the MODE button
repeatedly cycles through all
possible media sources whether they
are present or not.
To search up and down from the
current frequency and find a station
with a strong signal, press the top
(+) or bottom (−) of the button for
1 second.
10/07/17 10:29:13 31TK8600_417
Auxiliary Input Jack
The auxiliary input jack is
underneath the accessory power
socket on the front panel. The
system will accept auxiliary input
from standard audio accessories
using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
412
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:29:19 31TK8600_418
Radio Theft Protection
On all models except LX
Vehicle Specific Method − Press
and hold the power/volume knob for
a few seconds, the audio unit will
check the VIN information stored in
the vehicle. The audio system will
start activating if the VIN
information stored in the audio
system and the vehicle match.
Security Code Method − The enter
code screen will appear. Use the
preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code. The code is on the radio code
card included in your owner’s
manual kit. When it is entered
correctly, the radio will start playing.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for 1
hour before trying again.
If you cannot activate the audio
system, and lose the card, take the
vehicle to your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
413
Features
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disabled itself. If this
happens, there are two methods to
make it work again. Turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, press
the power/volume knob once. The
enter code screen will appear.
10/07/17 10:29:28 31TK8600_419
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with standard rear screen
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (radio, disc,
CD Library, HDD, USB, iPod , DVD
player or XM Radio) than the front
seat occupants. The audio is
broadcast through the supplied
wireless headphones.
This vehicle’s overhead mounted video
display, if so equipped, includes
mercury-containing components. Upon
removal, please reuse, recycle, or
dispose of as hazardous waste.
To turn off the rear control
You can disable the rear control
panel from the front control panel.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
On vehicles without navigation system
Press the SETUP button and turn
the selector knob to ‘‘Rear Setup,’’
then press the selector knob. Select
the ‘‘Rear Remote On.’’ Each time
you press and release the selector
knob, this feature turn on and off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
414
To Turn On the System
Press the REAR POWER button.
The indicator on the REAR POWER
button will come on. The rear seat
passengers can then operate the rear
system from the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can
also be detached and used as a
remote control, by pushing the
release button, and pulling the
remote toward you.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:29:35 31TK8600_420
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with navigation system
Rear Speakers
When you turn on the system, the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
audio display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the headphones.
If you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
POWER button until the Rear
Speakers Off icon goes off.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
To turn this feature off, turn the
interface dial to select the OFF icon,
and press ENTER on the interface
selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
415
Features
Press and release the REAR
SOURCE button. The indicator on
the REAR SOURCE button will come
on. The front screen shows the same
screen as the rear screen does. Push
the interface selector down. The
screen changes to the rear menu.
Turn the interface dial to the ‘‘Rear
Setup,’’ then press ENTER on the
interface dial. Turn the interface dial
to select the ‘‘Rear Control,’’ and
press ENTER.
10/07/17 10:29:41 31TK8600_421
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
REAR POWER BUTTON
REAR POWER BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD SLOT
DVD/CD
SLOT
DVD/CD
SLOT
OVERHEAD SCREEN UNIT
REAR SOURCE BUTTON
REAR SOURCE BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
416
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:29:50 31TK8600_422
Rear Entertainment System
When REAR SOURCE is selected,
the front entertainment system
audio controls can also be used to
operate the rear entertainment
system in all modes.
The media that the rear passengers
are listening to will then be heard
from the front speakers.
If you do not operate the rear
entertainment system from the front
panel within 20 seconds, the
indicator in the REAR SOURCE
button will go off and the display will
return to the front entertainment
system automatically.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
If an audio CD is loaded into the
upper slot, select the CD/CDL or
CD button. If a DVD or CD is loaded
into the lower slot, select the DVD
button.
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs, audio CDs, MP3/WMA
discs and DTS CDs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Features
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will
hear two beeps and the indicator in
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Open the overhead screen by pulling
down the bottom edge of the screen
until it locks into place when fully
extended. If you pull down the
screen too far forward, past the
second detent, the display will turn
off. Push the screen up to the second
or first detent to turn the display
back on. To close the screen, push it
up until it locks into place when fully
closed.
CONTINUED
417
10/07/17 10:29:59 31TK8600_423
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles without navigation system
SKIP BAR
EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
On vehicles with navigation system
SKIP BAR
EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
When you insert a DVD, the system
automatically starts to play. To turn
this feature off, see pages 420
and 423 .
PLAY − Press the
button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
DVD/CD SLOT
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
DVD/CD SLOT
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
418
2011 Odyssey
PAUSE − Press the
button to
pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
10/07/17 10:30:07 31TK8600_424
Rear Entertainment System
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
forward. Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
backward. Release the bar when the
system reaches the point you want.
EJECT − Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
Features
Each time you press the
side of
the SKIP bar and release it, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the SKIP bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
DVD Setup
On vehicles without navigation system
Press the REAR SOURCE button of
the front panel while the DVD is
playing on the overhead screen. The
front screen shows ‘‘REAR MENU.’’
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘DVD
Setup,’’ then press the selector knob.
You can choose DVD setup from
these selections:
Auto Play On
Audio
Search
Subtitle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
419
10/07/17 10:30:15 31TK8600_425
Rear Entertainment System
Audio
Subtitle
Auto Play ON
CHECK BOX
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Audio,’’
then press the selector knob. Turn
the selector knob to select the
language you want for DVD audio,
then press the selector knob. The
languages that appear on the screen
are limited to the language choices
available on the DVD.
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Subtitle,’’
then press the selector knob. Turn
the selector knob to select the
language you want for subtitles, then
press the selector knob. The
languages that appear on the screen
are limited to the language choices
available on the DVD.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
420
2011 Odyssey
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Auto Play
ON,’’ then press the selector knob.
When the check mark disappears
from the check box, the auto play
function also turns off.
Each time you press and release the
selector knob, this feature turns ON
and OFF.
10/07/17 10:30:24 31TK8600_426
Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with navigation system
Title or Chapter Search
Turn the selector knob to ‘‘Title
Search,’’ or ‘‘Chapter Search,’’ then
press the selector knob. Turn the
selector knob to a title or chapter
number, then press the selector
knob. The DVD skips to the selected
title or chapter.
Press the REAR SOURCE button
while a DVD is playing. Turn the
interface dial to ‘‘DVD Setup,’’ then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. You can choose DVD setup
from these selections:
Title Search
Subtitle
Repeat
Chapter Search
Audio
Auto Play
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Title
Search’’ or ‘‘Chapter Search,’’ then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial again to select
a title or chapter number, then press
ENTER on the interface selector.
The DVD skips to the selected title
or chapter.
Features
Title or Chapter Search
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
421
10/07/17 10:30:33 31TK8600_427
Rear Entertainment System
Audio
Subtitle
Repeat
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Audio,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial to select the
language you want for DVD audio,
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. The languages that appear
on the screen are limited to the
language choices available on
the DVD.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Subtitle,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Turn the dial to select the
language you want for subtitles, then
press ENTER on the interface
selector. The languages that appear
on the screen are limited to the
language choices available on
the DVD.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Repeat,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Select the icon in the center
(
) to repeat the current chapter,
the icon on the right (
) to
repeat the current title, or select
OFF to turn off repeat. If your DVD
does not support titles or chapters,
you cannot use this feature.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
422
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:30:40 31TK8600_428
Rear Entertainment System
Auto Play
Using the Rear Control Panel
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the
(power) button. Use
the FM/AM button, XM button,
CD/CDL or CD/HDD button, or
DVD/AUX button to select the
entertainment source. The selected
source will be shown in the display.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled. When the
front audio system is off or the front
panel’s Rear Power is off, the rear
control panel cannot be turned on.
Turn the interface dial to ‘‘Auto Play,’’
then press ENTER on the interface
selector. Select ON to play the DVD
automatically, or select OFF to play
the DVD manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
423
Features
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, press the REAR
SOURCE button. You will hear a
beep and the indicator in the button
goes off. The indicator also goes off
automatically when you do not
operate the rear entertainment
system for 20 seconds.
10/07/17 10:30:33 31TK8600_427
Rear Entertainment System
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
Press the FM/AM button to listen to
the radio.
Press the MENU button to display
the Audio Menu on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can
press and hold either side (
or
) of the TUNE/SKIP bar to
skip (seek) up/down, and press
either side (
or
) of the
TUNE/SKIP bar to tune up/down.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
On vehicles without navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
OVERHEAD SCREEN
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Press the XM button to listen to the
XM Radio. You can press either side
(
or
) of the TUNE/SKIP
bar to scroll up/down and select
channels within a category (in
CATEGORY mode), or to scroll up/
down and select from among all
available channels (in CH mode).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
424
2011 Odyssey
Press the MENU button to display
the audio menu on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system.
Pressing and holding the TITLE/
SCROLL button for 5 seconds
enables you to switch between
search modes.
10/07/17 10:30:58 31TK8600_430
Rear Entertainment System
When the TITLE/SCROLL button is
pressed, the title scrolls. When it is
pushed again, scrolling stops.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by pulling
down the bottom edge of the screen
until it locks into place when fully
extended. If you pull down the
screen too far forward, past the
second detent, the display will turn
off. Push the screen up to the second
or first detent to turn the display
back on. To close the screen, push it
up until it locks into place when fully
closed.
Press the
button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the
button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the
or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the
button to
move forward, or the
button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
,
,
, and
button
to move to the desired menu
selection, then press the ENTER
button to enter your selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
425
Features
To Play a Disc, CD Library, HDD,
USB, or iPod from the Rear
Control Panel
Use the
,
,
, or
button to highlight Repeat,
Random, or Scan on the screen. You
can enter the highlighted function by
pressing the ENTER button. These
functions have the same features as
those of the front audio system.
10/07/17 10:31:08 31TK8600_431
Rear Entertainment System
TITLE/SCROLL Button
MENU Button
Top Menu
When you press the TITLE/
SCROLL button while a DVD is
playing, the current status of title,
chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle,
audio, and sound characteristics are
displayed. To return to the DVD
video screen, press the TITLE/
SCROLL button again.
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD
Menu appears. The menu options
are TOP MENU, MENU, PLAY
MODE, SEARCH/NUMINPUT,
REPEAT, PAUSE/PLAY, and STOP.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU,’’ the
screen changes to the DVD’s title
menu. This menu also appears when
you press the MENU button while a
DVD is not playing. To go back to
play, press the MENU or CANCEL
button.
426
To go to your selected menu, use the
,
,
, or
button to
highlight the icon and press the
ENTER button. To return to the
DVD video screen,
select
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby: RETURN.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:31:19 31TK8600_432
Rear Entertainment System
Play Mode
‘‘Audio’’
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the
,
,
, or
button,
the screen changes to the DVD’s
title menu.
When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’
with the
,
,
, or
button, you can change the
DVD’s Audio, Subtitle or Angle
setting.
To change the Audio setting,
highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button. A submenu of dubbed
languages appears. You can select
another language by pressing the
or
button. The sound
characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language is also
displayed next to the language.
Features
Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
427
10/07/17 10:31:27 31TK8600_433
Rear Entertainment System
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.
‘‘Subtitle’’
‘‘Angle’’
To change the DVD’s subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or
▲ button. You can see the
available subtitles with the
or
button.
To change the view angle, highlight
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button. You
can see the available angle options
with the
or
button.
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
428
2011 Odyssey
If there are no multiple angles
available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1.’’
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
10/07/17 10:31:38 31TK8600_434
Rear Entertainment System
‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’
NumInput
Highlight ‘‘SEARCH’’ with the
or
button to select ‘‘Title,’’
‘‘Chapter,’’ or ‘‘NumInput’’ and press
ENTER.
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the
or
button to jump to your
desired title and press the ENTER
button. When ‘‘Chapter’’ is
highlighted, follow the same
procedure for the chapter search.
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a three digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Features
Search
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Highlight ‘‘NumInput’’ with the
or
button. Press the
ENTER button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.
CONTINUED
429
10/07/17 10:31:45 31TK8600_435
Rear Entertainment System
The cursor will automatically move
to the ‘‘ENT’’ icon when you finish
inputting the number. Press the
ENTER button to enter the number
command. The display goes back to
the DVD screen.
Use the
,
,
, or
button to select each number,
press the ENTER button. If you want
to delete a number, select ‘‘DEL’’ and
press ENTER, then select and enter
the new number.
With ‘‘Repeat’’ highlighted, each
time you press and release the
ENTER button, the repeat mode
changes from chapter repeat to title
repeat, and to repeat off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
430
Repeat
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:31:56 31TK8600_436
Rear Entertainment System
SETUP Button
To change a setup, use the
,
,
, or
button to
highlight your selection and press
the ENTER button. To return to the
DVD video screen, press the SETUP
or CANCEL button.
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
Disp Adjust, Aspect Ratio,
PERSONAL SURROUND, and
Language.
Features
Disp Adjust
To adjust the display, highlight ‘‘Disp
Adjust’’ from the setup menu with
the
,
,
, or
button and press the ENTER
button. You can adjust these display
settings:
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button. Adjust the setting by
pressing the
or
button.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, the cursor goes back to
the top of the setup menu, or press
the RETURN button to exit.
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ and
press the ENTER button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
431
10/07/17 10:32:03 31TK8600_437
Rear Entertainment System
Aspect Ratio
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
The display changes as shown above.
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the
or
button, then press
the ENTER button.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTER
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for 1 second, and
the screen returns to the play mode
in the selected setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
432
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:32:12 31TK8600_438
Rear Entertainment System
Personal Surround
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button, and enter your
selection by pressing the ENTER
button.
Language
To change the Personal Surround
setting, highlight ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ from the setup menu
with the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button and press the ENTER
button. The effect selection appears.
Features
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ there will be no
special sound effect.
You can change the display language
to English, French, or Spanish. Use
the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button to select the setting you
want, then press the ENTER button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
433
10/07/19 15:54:07 31TK8600_439
Rear Entertainment System
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is not playing, the setup
menu appears for audio.
Disp Adjust, PERSONAL SURROUND,
Appearance, and Language
Appearance
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu
You can change the color of the
screen to white, black, blue, brown,
or red. Use the
,
,
, or
button to select the setting you
want, then press the ENTER button.
When you press the MENU button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
There are three selectable menus:
Language Settings, Dynamic Range,
and Angle Mark.
The operation for these menus is the
same as that for using the DVD
player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
434
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:32:33 31TK8600_440
Rear Entertainment System
Menu Language
INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Features
When you select ‘‘Language
Settings’’ with the ▲ , ▼ ,
or
button, the menu shown
above appears.
To return to the stop or previous
screen, press the CANCEL button.
Because the priority language is
determined by each disc you insert,
you might not be able to set a
selected item.
,
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button.
Select the desired language by
pressing the
or
button,
and then pressing the ENTER
button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, Arabic,
German, Italian, Dutch, Chinese,
Korean, Thai, Japanese or others.
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTER
button. The display changes as
shown in the next column.
CONTINUED
435
10/07/17 10:32:40 31TK8600_441
Rear Entertainment System
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENTER button, the display returns
to the initial screen of the ‘‘Language
Settings’’ menu.
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first digit using the
▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button,
and press the ENTER button to
enter it. Repeat this until all four
digits are filled. When the fourth
digit is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENTER button on
the control panel to enter the new
language code.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
436
2011 Odyssey
If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the
display with the ▲ , ▼ ,
,
or
button, and press the
ENTER button on the control panel.
Then select and enter the correct
number digit as described. The
display returns to the initial
‘‘Language’’ menu screen.
10/07/17 10:32:49 31TK8600_442
Rear Entertainment System
Subtitle Language
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button.
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Features
Audio Language
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
437
10/07/17 10:32:58 31TK8600_443
Rear Entertainment System
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
Select the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ by
pressing the ▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
press the ENTER button. Select
‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing the
or
button. Then press the
ENTER button to set your selection.
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
438
2011 Odyssey
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
▲ , ▼ ,
, or
button.
To turn ‘‘Angle Mark’’ on or off,
press the ENTER button. Select
‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing the
or
button. Then press the
ENTER button to set your selection.
10/07/17 10:33:06 31TK8600_444
Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs
The DVD player can also play discs
recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC
formats and DTS CDs.
Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision.
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
439
Features
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot be
played in this system.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
10/07/17 10:30:33 31TK8600_427
Rear Entertainment System
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and the
the Symbol are registered
trademarks and DTS Digital
Surround and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software.
DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 352 .
Remote Control
See page 470 .
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
See page 470 .
Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Wireless Headphones
See page 471 .
Auxiliary Input Jacks
See pages 473 and 474 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
440
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:33:24 31TK8600_446
Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
On vehicles without navigation system
Error Message
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
CHECK DISC
FOCUS Error
PUSH EJECT
Mechanical Error
CHECK REGION
UNSUPPORTED
FILE
Invalid region code
DVD format not
supported
Solution
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear or the disc
cannot be removed, consult your dealer.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
system.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
On vehicles with navigation system
If you see an error message in the
display, see page 469 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
441
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Cause
10/07/17 10:33:29 31TK8600_447
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
On vehicles with ultrawide rear screen.
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (radio, disc,
HDD, USB, iPod , DVD player or
XM Radio) than the front seat
occupants. The audio is broadcast
through the supplied wireless
headphones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
442
2011 Odyssey
To Turn On the System
Press the REAR POWER button.
The indicator on the REAR POWER
button will come on. The rear seat
passengers can then operate the rear
system from the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can
also be detached and used as a
remote control, by pushing the
release button, and pulling the
remote toward you.
10/07/19 15:54:13 31TK8600_448
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
To turn off the rear control
Rear Speakers
When you turn on the system, the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
audio display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the headphones.
If you want to turn the rear speakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
POWER button until the Rear
Speakers Off icon goes off.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
To disable the rear control panel,
turn the interface dial to select the
OFF icon, and press ENTER on the
interface selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
443
Features
You can disable the rear control
panel from the front control panel.
Press and release the REAR
SOURCE button. The indicator on
the REAR SOURCE button will come
on. The front screen shows the same
screen as the rear screen does. Push
the interface selector down. The
screen changes to the rear menu.
Turn the interface dial to the ‘‘Rear
Setup,’’ then press ENTER on the
interface dial. Turn the interface dial
to select the ‘‘Rear Control,’’ and
press ENTER.
10/07/17 10:33:40 31TK8600_449
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
REAR POWER BUTTON
REAR SOURCE BUTTON
CD SLOT
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
DVD/CD SLOT
444
2011 Odyssey
OVERHEAD SCREEN UNIT
10/07/17 10:33:49 31TK8600_450
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, press
the REAR SOURCE button. You will
hear two beeps and the indicator in
the button comes on to show that the
control panel is enabled.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
When REAR SOURCE is selected,
the front entertainment system
audio controls can also be used to
operate the rear entertainment
system in all modes.
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs, audio CDs, MP3/WMA
discs and DTS CDs.
OPEN BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Features
If an audio CD is loaded into the
upper slot, select the CD button. If a
DVD or CD is loaded into the lower
slot, select the DVD button.
The media that the rear passengers
are listening to will then be heard
from the front speakers.
If you do not operate the rear
entertainment system from the front
panel within 20 seconds, the
indicator in the REAR SOURCE
button will go off and the display will
return to the front entertainment
system automatically.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent. The
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
CONTINUED
445
10/07/17 10:33:57 31TK8600_451
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
SKIP BAR
Insert a DVD into the lower DVD/
CD slot in the audio unit.
EJECT BUTTON
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
button if
PLAY − Press the
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
CD SLOT
DVD/CD
SLOT
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
446
2011 Odyssey
When you insert a DVD, the system
automatically starts to play. To turn
this feature off, see page 423 .
button to
PAUSE − Press the
pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
10/07/17 10:34:05 31TK8600_452
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
forward. Press and hold the
side of the SKIP bar to move
backward. Release the bar when the
system reaches the point you want.
Using the Rear Control Panel
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the
(power) button. Press
the SOURCE button and display the
selectable entertainment sources in
the overhead screen. Turn the
interface dial and press the ENTER
button to set your selection. Make
sure the rear control operation has
not been disabled. When the front
audio system is off or the front panel’s
Rear Power is off, the rear control
panel cannot be turned on.
EJECT − Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
DVD Setup
See page 421 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
447
Features
Each time you press the
side of
the SKIP bar and release it, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the SKIP bar to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, press the REAR
SOURCE button. You will hear a
beep and the indicator in the button
goes off. The indicator also goes off
automatically when you do not
operate the rear entertainment
system for 20 seconds.
10/07/17 10:34:12 31TK8600_453
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Screen modes
You can select between the two
screen modes, single or dual, for the
overhead screen.
In single mode, your selected source
appears in the center of the screen.
In dual mode, two separate screens
appear side to side. In dual mode,
you can only select one output
source from the front audio system.
The other media for the other screen
must come from ‘‘AUX-VIDEO’’ or
‘‘AUX-HDMI.’’
See page 450 for more details about
screen modes.
SOURCE SINGLE DUAL
SWAP
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
ENTER
BUTTON
DVD
BUTTON
AUX
BUTTON
SOURCE button − Press this
button to change the selectable
entertainment source from the
overhead screen. Turn the interface
dial and press the ENTER button to
set your selected source.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
448
INTERFACE DIAL
2011 Odyssey
SINGLE button − When you press
this button while the overhead
screen is in the dual mode, you can
choose which source to continue in
single mode, and which source to
end. The message ‘‘Choose which
source to continue’’ appears. Turn
the interface dial to make your
selection, then press ENTER.
With the overhead screen in single
mode, the SINGLE button functions
the same as the SOURCE button.
10/07/17 10:34:18 31TK8600_454
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
If you press the DUAL button while
in dual mode, you can change the
media source on either side of the
screen.
SWAP button − When you press
this button while the overhead
screen is in the dual mode, you can
swap the left and right source on the
overhead screen.
AUX button − When you press this
button, the overhead screen changes
to the last selected auxiliary mode. If
you press this button while the rear
screen is in the dual mode, a
message to choose the left or right
side of the screen to be displayed
will appear. Turn the interface dial
and press the ENTER button. Your
selected side screen will change to
the auxiliary source menu. Select
your source and press ENTER again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
DVD button − When you press this
button, the overhead screen changes
to the DVD video screen. When you
press the DVD button while the
overhead screen is in the dual mode,
a message to choose the left or right
side of the screen to be displayed
will appear. Turn the interface dial
and press the ENTER button to set
your selection.
CONTINUED
449
Features
DUAL button − When you press
this button while the overhead
screen is in the single mode, you can
add another screen to play separate
media. A message appears that
allows you to choose a side to add a
second source. Turn the interface
dial, select right or left, and press the
ENTER button. The selectable
source menu will appear. Set the
source you want to add. The screen
will change to the dual mode.
10/07/17 10:34:32 31TK8600_455
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
The dual screen modes are:
Source change − Single mode
SINGLE MODE
DVD
AUX-VIDEO
AUX-HDMI
Press AUX button.
Press AUX button.
Select ‘‘AUX-VIDEO.’’
Press SOURCE or
SINGLE button.
Select
‘‘AUX-HDMI.’’
Select Other Source.
(Disc, radio, XM, etc.)
Single mode to Dual mode
SINGLE MODE
DVD
DUAL MODE
DVD
Select
‘‘RIGHT.’’
DUAL MODE
AUX-VIDEO
Press DUAL
button.
Select
‘‘LEFT.’’
450
AUX-VIDEO
Select
‘‘AUX-VIDEO.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Select
‘‘AUX-VIDEO.’’
DVD
10/07/17 20:21:28 31TK8600_456
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Dual mode to Single mode
DUAL MODE
DVD
SINGLE MODE
DVD
Select ‘‘DVD.’’
AUX1
Features
Press SINGLE
button.
AUX-VIDEO
Select ‘‘AUX-VIDEO.’’
Swap source
DUAL MODE
DVD
AUX-VIDEO
AUX-VIDEO
DVD
Press SWAP button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
451
10/07/17 10:34:48 31TK8600_457
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
To listen to the radio, press the
SOURCE button for the selectable
sources to appear in the overhead
screen. Turn the interface dial to
select ‘‘AM,’’ ‘‘FM1’’ or ‘‘FM2,’’ then
press the ENTER button.
Press the MENU button to display
the Audio Menu on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system. You can
press and hold either side (
or
) of the TUNE/SKIP bar to
skip (seek) up/down, and press
either side (
of
) of the
TUNE/SKIP bar to tune up/down.
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OVERHEAD SCREEN
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Press the SOURCE button and turn
the interface dial to ‘‘XM1’’ or ‘‘XM2.’’
Press ENTER to listen to the XM
Radio. You can press either side
(
or
) of the TUNE/SKIP
bar to scroll up/down and select
channels within a category (in
CATEGORY mode), or to scroll up/
down and select from among all
available channels (in CH mode).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
452
2011 Odyssey
Press the MENU button to display
the audio menu on the overhead
screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system.
Pressing and holding the TITLE/
SCROLL button for 5 seconds
enables you to switch between
search modes.
10/07/17 10:34:57 31TK8600_458
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
When the TITLE/SCROLL button is
pressed, the title scrolls for about 10
seconds. When it is pushed again,
scrolling stops.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent. The
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
Press the
button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Press the
button to skip to the
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the
button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the
button again quickly
to go to the previous chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the
or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the
button to
move forward, or the
button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
interface dial to turn to the desired
menu selection, then press the
ENTER button to enter your
selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
453
Features
To Play a Disc, HDD, USB, or
iPod from the Rear Control
Panel
Use the interface dial to highlight
REPEAT, RANDOM (or SHUFFLE
if your source is iPod), or SCAN on
the screen. You can enter the
highlighted function by pressing the
ENTER button. These functions
have the same features as those of
the front audio system.
10/07/17 10:35:07 31TK8600_459
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
TITLE/SCROLL Button
MENU Button
Top Menu
When you press the TITLE/
SCROLL button while a DVD is
playing, the current status of title,
chapter, elapsed time, angle, subtitle,
audio, and sound characteristics are
displayed. To return to the DVD
video screen, press the TITLE/
SCROLL button again.
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD
Menu appears. The menu options
are TOP MENU, MENU, PLAY
MODE, SEARCH/NUMINPUT,
REPEAT, PAUSE/PLAY, and STOP.
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU,’’ the
screen changes to the DVD’s title
menu. This menu also appears when
you press the MENU button while a
DVD is not playing. To go back to
play, press the MENU or CANCEL
button.
454
To go to your selected menu, use the
interface dial to highlight the icon
and press the ENTER button. To
return to the DVD video screen,
select RETURN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:35:16 31TK8600_460
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Play Mode
‘‘Audio’’
When you select ‘‘MENU’’ with the
interface dial, the screen changes to
the DVD’s title menu.
When you select ‘‘PLAY MODE’’
with the interface dial, you can
change the DVD’s Audio, Subtitle or
Angle setting.
To change the Audio setting,
highlight ‘‘Audio’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or ▲ button.
A submenu of the dubbed language
appears. You can select another
language by turning the interface
dial. The sound characteristics
(Dolby Digital, LPCM, MPEG Audio,
dts) recorded with the selected
language are also displayed next to
the language.
Features
Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
455
10/07/17 10:35:24 31TK8600_461
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
not be available on some DVDs.
‘‘Subtitle’’
‘‘Angle’’
To change the DVD’s subtitle,
highlight ‘‘Subtitle’’ from the play
mode menu with the ▼ or ▲ button.
You can see the available subtitles
with the interface dial.
To change the view angle, highlight
‘‘Angle’’ from the play mode menu
with the ▼ or ▲ button. You can see
the available angle options with the
interface dial.
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
If there are no multiple angles
available on the DVD, you cannot
change from ‘‘Angle 1.’’
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
456
2011 Odyssey
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
10/07/17 10:35:34 31TK8600_462
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
‘‘Title/Chapter Search’’
NumInput
Highlight ‘‘SEARCH’’ with the
interface dial to select ‘‘Title,’’
‘‘Chapter,’’ or ‘‘NumInput’’ and press
ENTER.
With ‘‘Title’’ highlighted, use the
interface dial to jump to your desired
title and press the ENTER button.
When ‘‘Chapter’’ is highlighted,
follow the same procedure for the
chapter search.
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a three digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Features
Search
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Highlight ‘‘NumInput’’ with the
or
button. Press the
ENTER button to go to the
NumInput selection screen.
CONTINUED
457
10/07/17 10:35:43 31TK8600_463
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Repeat
SETUP Button
REPEAT ICON
Rotate the interface dial to select
each number, then press the ENTER
button. Press the
button when
you have finished inputting the
number. If you want to delete a
number, press the
button.
With ‘‘Repeat’’ highlighted, each
time you press and release the
ENTER button, the repeat mode
changes from chapter repeat to title
repeat, and to repeat off.
To go back to the DVD screen, press
the MENU or CANCEL button or
select RETURN and press the
ENTER button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
458
2011 Odyssey
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the setup
menu appears. The menu options are
‘‘Brightness,’’ ‘‘Display Adjust,’’
‘‘Aspect Ratio,’’ ‘‘Appearance,’’
‘‘PERSONAL SURROUND,’’ and
‘‘Language.’’
To change a setup, use the interface
dial to highlight your selection and
press the ENTER button. To return
to the DVD video screen, press the
SETUP or CANCEL button.
10/07/17 10:35:50 31TK8600_464
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Brightness
Display Adjust
To adjust the display, highlight
‘‘Display Adjust’’ from the setup
menu with the interface dial and
press the ENTER button. You can
adjust these display settings:
Features
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Reset
Select the quality you want to adjust
by turning the interface dial. Adjust
the setting by turning the interface
dial. To go back to the Display
Adjust screen, press the ENTER or
CANCEL button.
To adjust the brightness of the
display, highlight ‘‘Brightness’’ from
the setup menu with the interface
dial and press the ENTER button.
Adjust the setting by turning the
interface dial.
To go back to play, press the MENU
or CANCEL button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
459
10/07/17 10:35:59 31TK8600_465
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Aspect Ratio
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by turning
the interface dial, then press the
ENTER button. You can choose
between ‘‘Wide’’ or ‘‘Zoom.’’ The
following settings are available:
Wide
Normal
Full
Super Full
Ultra Full
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
turning the interface dial, and then
pressing the ENTER button.
The display changes as shown above.
Zoom
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENTER
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for a few seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
460
2011 Odyssey
Super Zoom
Ultra Zoom
10/07/17 10:36:07 31TK8600_466
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Wide
Zoom
Features
Select ‘‘Wide’’ by turning the
interface dial then press the ENTER
button. The available settings are
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue. Select the
desired setting by turning the
interface dial, then press the ENTER
button.
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for 1 second, and
the screen returns to the play mode
in the selected setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Select ‘‘Zoom’’ by turning the
interface dial then press the ENTER
button. The available settings are
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue. Select the
desired setting by turning the
interface dial, then press the ENTER
button.
CONTINUED
461
10/07/17 10:36:13 31TK8600_467
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for 1 second, and
the screen returns to the play mode
in the selected setting.
Appearance
Personal Surround
You can change the color of the
menu screen to white, black, blue,
brown, or red. It can be also
synchronized with the front
navigation system. Rotate the
interface dial to the setting you want,
then press the ENTER button.
To change the personal surround
setting, highlight ‘‘Personal
Surround’’ from the setup menu with
the interface dial and press the
ENTER button. The effect selection
appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
462
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:36:22 31TK8600_468
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Select ‘‘Music,’’ ‘‘Cinema,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by turning the interface dial, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENTER button.
Language
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu
You can change the display language
to English, French, or Spanish.
Rotate the interface dial to the
setting you want, then press the
ENTER button.
When you press the MENU button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ there will be no
special sound effect.
Features
There are three selectable menus:
‘‘Language Settings,’’ ‘‘Dynamic
Range,’’ and ‘‘Angle Mark.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
463
10/07/17 10:36:32 31TK8600_469
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
When you select ‘‘Language
Settings’’ with the interface dial, the
menu shown above appears.
To return to the stop or previous
screen, press the CANCEL button.
Because the priority language is
determined by each disc you insert,
you might not be able to set a
selected item.
Menu Language
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu
Language’’ by pressing the ▼ or ▲
button.
Select the desired language by
turning the interface dial, and then
pressing the ENTER button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
464
2011 Odyssey
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, Arabic,
German, Italian, Dutch, Chinese,
Korean, Thai, Japanese or others.
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENTER
button. The display changes as
shown in the next column.
10/07/17 10:36:40 31TK8600_470
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Features
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENTER button, the display returns
to the initial screen of the ‘‘Language
Settings’’ menu.
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first digit using the
interface dial, and press the ENTER
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. Press the
button on the control panel to
enter the new language code.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If you made a mistake entering a
number digit, press the
button
on the control panel. Then select and
enter the correct digit as described.
The display returns to the initial
‘‘Language Settings’’ menu screen.
CONTINUED
465
10/07/17 10:36:48 31TK8600_471
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Audio Language
Subtitle Language
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Language’’ by pressing
the ▼ or ▲ button.
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Language’’ by
pressing the ▼ or ▲ button.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
466
2011 Odyssey
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
10/07/17 10:36:56 31TK8600_472
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Angle Mark
ANGLE MARK
Features
Select the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ by
turning the interface dial.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by turning the
interface dial, and then press the
ENTER button.
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the lower right corner
of the screen.
Select the ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by turning
the interface dial. If you want the
angle mark to be displayed, select
‘‘ON’’ by turning the interface dial,
and then press the ENTER button.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
467
10/07/17 10:30:33 31TK8600_427
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Playable DVDs
The DVD player can also play discs
recorded in MP3/WMA/AAC
formats and DTS CDs.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’ region. DVD-ROMs cannot be
played in this system.
This product incorporates copyright
protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Protecting DVDs
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page 352 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
468
Manufactured under license under
U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued & pending. DTS and the
the Symbol are registered
trademarks and DTS Digital
Surround and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
includes software.
DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:37:14 31TK8600_474
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
DVD Player Error Messages
On vehicles with navigation system
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
DISC ERROR
Cause
FOCUS Error
MECH ERROR
Mechanical Error
HEAT ERROR
High Temperature
REGION ERR
UNSUPPORTED
Invalid region code
DVD format not
supported
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS MANUAL
Mechanical Error
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Solution
Press the disc eject button, and remove the disc.
Check for an error indication. Insert the disc
again. If the code does not disappear, consult
your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the
disc, and insert a disc compatible with this
system.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
(see page 353). Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
469
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Error Message
10/07/17 10:37:23 31TK8600_475
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Remote Control
Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
COVER
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
RELEASE BUTTON
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
470
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
Battery type: BR3032
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
10/07/17 10:37:29 31TK8600_476
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
VOLUME DIAL
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. Wearing the
headphones backwards may affect
audio reception, limiting the sound
quality and range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
471
Features
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
Wireless Headphones
10/07/17 10:37:38 31TK8600_477
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Wired Headphones
Changing the Sound Source
In the dual screen mode, you can
switch the sound source of the
headphones between the left and
right side screens.
WIRED HEADPHONES INDICATOR
WIRED HEADPHONES
TAB
Slide the tab to ‘‘L’’ for the left side,
‘‘R’’ for the right side.
If you connected a set of wired
headphones, you can switch the
sound source from the setup menu.
When you press the SETUP button
while the overhead screen is in the
dual mode, the setup menu appears.
Turn the interface dial to select
‘‘Wired Headphones.’’ Press the
ENTER button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
472
2011 Odyssey
The screen changes to the wired
headphones setup menu. Select
‘‘Left’’ or ‘‘Right’’ and press the
ENTER button to switch the sound
source. The wired headphones
indicator appears on the selected
side screen.
10/07/17 10:37:46 31TK8600_478
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
Replacing Batteries
COVER
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Features
BATTERY
COIN
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are above the
third row seat armrest on the driver’s
side.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
473
10/07/17 10:37:53 31TK8600_479
Ultrawide Rear Entertainment System
VOLUME DIALS
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
There are two headphone
connectors for the third row seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
There is an HDMI input jack above
the third row seat armrest on the
passenger’s side. The system will
accept HDMI input from video
games and video equipment which
are equipped with an HDMI jack.
To use the HDMI input jack, open
the outlet cover and insert the cable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
474
HDMI Input Jack
2011 Odyssey
10/07/19 15:54:24 31TK8600_480
Compass
On EX and EX-L models without
navigation system
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the compass is
self-calibrating, then the compass
display is shown in the display.
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is
not self-calibrating, or the compass
display is blinking with the CAL
indicator on, do the following
procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Features
Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Compass Calibration
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
CONTINUED
475
10/07/19 15:54:33 31TK8600_481
Compass
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
5. Press the selector knob. The
compass display is blinking and
the CAL indicator is shown.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
complete circles.
When the calibration is successfully
completed, the CAL indicator goes
off and the compass display will stop
blinking and show an actual heading.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘CALIBRATION.’’
4. Press the selector knob to enter
your selection. The display shows
you ‘‘PUSH CAL START’’ or ‘‘Start
Calibration.’’
While setting the compass, press
the RETURN button to go back to
the previous display. Pressing the
SETUP button will cancel the
compass setting mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
476
2011 Odyssey
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is calibrating, the
display returns to the normal display
which you last selected.
10/07/19 15:54:44 31TK8600_482
Compass
Compass Zone Selection
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
U.S. EX models
U.S. EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
EX-L and Canadian EX models
Features
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button
for about 5 seconds. The display
shows you the compass setting
menu items.
3. Turn the selector knob to select
‘‘ZONE’’ or ‘‘Zone Adjust.’’ Press
the selector knob to enter your
selection. The display shows you
the currently selected zone
number.
4. Find the zone for your area on the
map (see page 478 ). If the correct
zone is not shown, turn the
selector knob to cycle the zone
lists up or down.
5. Once the correct zone is displayed,
press the selector knob. The
display then returns to normal.
If necessary, press the RETURN
button to return to the previous
display. Pressing the SETUP
button will cancel the compass
setting mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
477
10/07/17 10:38:31 31TK8600_483
Compass
The audio system is not related to
the compass system. Even if the
compass system is in the zone
setting mode, the display returns to
the normal display which you last
selected.
Zone Map
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
478
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:38:38 31TK8600_484
Security System
The alarm will also be activated if a
passenger inside the locked vehicle
turns the ignition switch on.
On all models except LX
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. Before you leave the
vehicle, make sure the doors,
tailgate, and hood are securely
closed.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the audio unit
is removed from the dashboard or
the wiring is cut.
NOTE: To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
479
Features
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
activated system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
10/07/17 10:38:46 31TK8600_485
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
Using Cruise Control
CRUISE BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
480
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:38:55 31TK8600_486
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set speed in
any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired speed, release the button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
481
Features
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
You can decrease the set speed in
any of these ways:
10/07/17 10:39:02 31TK8600_487
Cruise Control
Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on. The vehicle accelerates to
the same speed as before.
The cruise control will be canceled
when the vehicle speed reaches
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system completely off and erases
the previous set speed.
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
482
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:39:12 31TK8600_488
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
On all models except LX
General Information
Before programming your
HomeLink to operate a garage door
opener, confirm that the opener has
an external entrapment protection
system, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’
or other safety and reverse stop
features.
If your garage door was
manufactured before April 1, 1982,
you may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. These units
do not have safety features that
cause the motor to stop and reverse
it if an obstacle is detected during
closing, increasing the risk of injury.
Do not use HomeLink with any
garage door opener that lacks safety
stop and reverse features.
Units manufactured between April 1,
1982 and January 1, 1993 may be
equipped with safety stop and
reverse features. If your unit does
not have an external entrapment
protection system, an easy test to
confirm the function and
performance of the safety stop and
reverse feature is to lay a 2 × 4
under the closing door. The door
should stop and reverse upon
contacting the piece of wood.
As an additional safety feature,
garage door openers manufactured
after January 1, 1993 are required to
have external entrapment protection
systems, such as an electronic eye,
which detect an object obstructing
the door.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety
information
that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
came with your garage door opener
to test that the safety features are
functioning properly. If you do not
have this information, contact the
manufacturer of the equipment.
Before programming HomeLink to a
garage door or gate opener, make
sure that people and objects are out
of the way of the device to prevent
potential injury or damage.
When programming a garage door
opener, park just outside the garage.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin − If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
CONTINUED
step 1.
483
Features
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
can be programmed to operate up to
three remote controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
10/07/17 10:39:24 31TK8600_489
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
484
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:39:29 31TK8600_490
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Features
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
485
10/07/19 15:58:31 31TK8600_491
Parking Sensor System
All obstacles may not always be
sensed. Even when the system is on,
you should look for obstacles near
your vehicle to make sure it is safe to
park.
On Touring models and Canadian EX-L
models
Your vehicle has a parking sensor
system. The system lets you know
the approximate distance between
your vehicle and most obstacles
while you are parking. When the
system is on and your vehicle is
nearing an obstacle, you will hear a
beeping and see parking sensor
indicators on the multi-information
display or the instrument panel,
depending on models.
The system has two front corner
sensors, two rear corner sensors,
and two rear center sensors.
PARKING SENSOR SYSTEM SWITCH
To activate the system, push the
switch on the dashboard with the
ignition in the ON (II) position. The
indicator in the switch comes on
when the system is on. To turn the
system off, push the switch again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
486
2011 Odyssey
The rear center sensors work when
the shift lever is in reverse (R), and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
The corner sensors work only when
the shift lever is in any position other
than P and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
10/07/19 15:58:37 31TK8600_492
Parking Sensor System
Indicators and Beeper Operation
on the Multi-Information
Display/Instrument Panel/Audio
Screen
Features
Instrument Panel
Multi-Information Display
When the system senses an obstacle,
the appropriate indicator comes on,
and a beeper sounds as shown in the
following tables.
Audio Screen
The parking sensor indicators are
automatically displayed on the audio
screen when an obstacle is detected.
When you turn the system on, a
beeper sounds once.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
487
10/07/19 15:58:45 31TK8600_493
Parking Sensor System
Corner Sensor Operation
Example shown: Obstacle is at the left front of the vehicle.
About 18-24 in
(45-60 cm)
About 14-18 in
(35-45 cm)
About 14 in
(35 cm) or less
Distance
Upper left indicator stays on.
Indicator blinks.
INDICATOR
Indicator
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Beeper
Short beeps
Audio
Screen
Indicator
Color
Amber
488
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Very short beeps
AUDIO SCREEN
Continuous
beeps
Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/19 15:58:53 31TK8600_494
Parking Sensor System
Rear Center Sensor Operation
About 28-43 in
(70-110 cm)
About 22-28 in
(55-70 cm)
About 18-22 in
(45-55 cm)
About 18 in
(45 cm) or less
Distance
Features
Bottom indicator stays on.
Indicator blinks.
Indicator
INDICATOR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Beeper
Long beeps
Short beeps
Audio
Screen
Indicator
Color
Yellow
Amber
Very short beeps
AUDIO SCREEN
Continuous
beeps
Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
2011 Odyssey
489
10/07/19 15:58:59 31TK8600_495
Parking Sensor System
On models with multi-information
display
If the system develops a problem,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK PARKING
SENSOR SYSTEM’’ message on the
multi-information display, and a
beeper sounds continuously.
Canadian EX-L models
If the system develops a problem,
you will see all parking sensor
indicators on the instrument panel,
and a beeper sounds continuously.
Very often, a sensor covered with
mud, ice, snow, etc. is the cause of
this display. Check the sensors first.
If the indicators stay on or the
beeper does not stop, have the
system checked by your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
490
If there is a problem with any of the
operational sensors, the indicators
for these sensors will appear
constantly in red.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:40:15 31TK8600_496
Parking Sensor System
When the system is affected by
some electrical equipment or
devices generating an ultrasonic
wave.
When operating the vehicle in bad
weather.
The range of the corner sensors and
the rear center sensor are limited.
Each corner sensor is capable of
sensing an obstacle only when your
vehicle is 24 in (60 cm) or closer.
The rear center sensor senses an
obstacle that is behind your vehicle
43 in (1.1 m) or closer.
Do not put any accessories on or
around the sensors.
Within about 43 in (1.1 m)
The system may not function
properly under these conditions:
The system cannot sense objects
directly under the bumper.
The sensors are covered with
snow, ice, mud, etc.
When the vehicle is on a rough
road, on grass, or on a hill.
After the vehicle has been sitting
out in hot or cold weather.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
491
Features
Within about 24 in (60 cm)
The system may not sense thin or
low objects, or sonic-absorptive
materials such as snow, cotton, or
sponge.
10/07/17 10:40:23 31TK8600_497
Parking Sensor System
The parking sensor system must be
turned off before beginning this
procedure.
When you shift to reverse (R), the
LED indicator in the switch will blink
as a reminder that the rear sensors
are disabled.
1. Press and hold the parking sensor
system switch and then turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
To return to the original setting,
repeat the procedure. A beeper will
sound 3 times to confirm that the
rear sensors are now enabled.
To turn off all rear sensors
This ISM device complies with Canadian
ICES-001.
2. Keep pressing the switch for 10
seconds. The LED indicator in the
switch will flash.
3. Press the switch again and the
LED indicator will turn off. A
beeper will sound twice to confirm
that the rear sensors are now
disabled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
492
Canadian Owners:
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:40:30 31TK8600_498
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On Canadian EX and EX-L without
navigation system
The camera display has parking
guidelines that indicate distance
from your vehicle.
SCREEN DISPLAY
20 in (0.5 m)
39 in (1 m)
79 in (2 m)
118 in (3 m)
Canadian EX-L models
The parking sensor indicators are
automatically displayed on the audio
screen when an obstacle is detected.
ACTUAL DISTANCE
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rearview is shown
on the display.
1st Line
2nd Line
3rd Line
4th Line
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
493
Features
1st Line
2nd Line
3rd Line
4th Line
10/07/17 10:40:37 31TK8600_499
Rearview Camera and Monitor
NOTE:
For the best picture, always keep
the rearview camera clean, and do
not cover the camera lens. To
avoid scratching the lens when
you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth.
To turn off the guidelines, press and
hold the RETURN button for about 3
seconds.
The rearview camera has a unique
lens that makes objects appear
closer than they actually are.
The rearview camera display has a
limited coverage, and the size and
position of objects may appear
different than they actually are.
Make sure to check the
surrounding area carefully.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
494
2011 Odyssey
On models with Navigation System
Refer to the navigation system
manual for operation of the rearview
camera.
10/07/17 10:40:47 31TK8600_500
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using voice commands,
without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
Selector Knob
RETURN BUTTON
PHONE
BUTTON
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876.
SELECTOR KNOB
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
Use the selector knob to make menu
or list selections.
Features
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
U.S. model is shown.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
Press the RETURN button to go
back to the previous screen.
To select an item on the screen, turn
the selector knob left or right to
highlight it, and then push the
selector knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
495
10/07/17 10:40:57 31TK8600_501
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
HFL Buttons
TALK BUTTON
Voice Control Tips
PICK-UP BUTTON
MICROPHONE
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
Language Selection
BACK BUTTON
HANG-UP BUTTON
PICK-UP Button − Press and
release to answer a call, or press to
go directly to the Phone screen.
HANG-UP Button − Press and
release to end or decline a call.
TALK Button − Press and release
to call a number with a stored voice
tag.
BACK Button − Press and release
to cancel a command.
EX-L model is shown.
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Press and release the Talk button
when you want to call a number
using a stored voice tag. After the
beep, speak in a clear, natural tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
496
2011 Odyssey
You can change the system language
to English, French, or Spanish (see
page 317 ).
10/07/17 10:41:03 31TK8600_502
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Display
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
ROAM STATUS
SIGNAL STRENGTH
When you receive an incoming call,
you will see the following displays
and notifications.
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
CALL NAME PHONE DIALING
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to the screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
497
Features
U.S. model is shown.
10/07/17 10:41:09 31TK8600_503
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Speed Dial
Display a list of all 20 speed dial entries.
All Calls
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Received Calls
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Dialed Calls
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Missed
Calls
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Alphabet
Search
Display the menu for an alphabetical search in the paired phone’s
phonebook.
Call History
Phone
Phonebook
All Listings
Dial
Redial
498
Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook
(or import a new one).
Enter a phone number to dial.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Redial the last number
dialed
in the phone’s history.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:41:14 31TK8600_504
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Add New Phone
Connect
Connection
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete
Delete a previously paired phone.
Bluetooth PIN
Phone
Setup
Edit
Speed Dial
Features
Phone
Pair a phone to the system.
Create a Bluetooth PIN number for a paired phone.
Store
Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, Phonebook, or manual
entry to store as a speed dial number.
Delete
Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
2011 Odyssey
499
10/07/17 10:41:17 31TK8600_505
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Phone
Phone
Setup
Security Code
Create a security code number for a paired phone.
Auto Answer
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
System Clear
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and security codes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
500
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:41:24 31TK8600_506
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Phone Screen
Features
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Phone Setup
You can setup your phone and other
system options with this menu. A
brief explanation of each option is
displayed on the left side of the
screen.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
501
10/07/17 10:41:31 31TK8600_507
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Setup Bluetooth Phone
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system):
Example
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system starts pairing
when there is no phone paired to the
system.
1. Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system prompts
you to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’
on the confirmation screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
502
2011 Odyssey
2. Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is on, and
select ‘‘Continue.’’ HFL begins to
search for your phone.
10/07/17 10:41:42 31TK8600_508
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
3. If your phone is found, it is
displayed on the screen. Select it
and press ENTER.
To pair a cell phone (when there are one
or more phones paired to the system):
Features
4. If your phone doesn’t appear on
the list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’
and search for Bluetooth devices
using your phone. From your
phone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’
5. HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key
that you will need to input on your
phone.
6. When your phone prompts you,
input the 4-digit pass-key.
7. You will receive a notification on
the screen and your phone if
pairing is successful.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Setup’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’
4. Follow steps 2 through 7 from the
previous page.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
503
10/07/17 10:41:52 31TK8600_509
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Phone pairing tips
To change the Bluetooth PIN setting:
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Example
Up to six phones can be paired.
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
Push the SELECT to delete.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
To create your own Bluetooth PIN,
select ‘‘Fixed PIN’’ and follow steps 3
and 4.
2. Select ‘‘Bluetooth PIN.’’
3. Delete the current Bluetooth PIN.
NOTE: The default Bluetooth PIN
‘‘0000’’ is used until you change the
setting.
4. Enter a new Bluetooth PIN.
For a randomly generated Bluetooth
PIN each time you pair a phone,
select ‘‘Random
I
nf
or
maPIN.’’
t
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
504
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:42:01 31TK8600_510
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To delete a paired phone:
4. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
Edit Security Code
You can set each security code on all
six cell phones. Each can be security
code protected, and have its own
phonebook, speed dial, and call
history.
Features
BLUETOOTH ICON
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
SPEED DIAL LIST WHEN
SECURITY CODE-PROTECTED
2. Select ‘‘Delete.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
delete. The Bluetooth icon shows
you the currently linked phone.
If the phone name you selected is
security code protected the speed
dial list becomes ‘‘*******.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
505
10/07/17 10:42:09 31TK8600_511
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
If the phone is already security code
protected, you need to enter the
current security code before clearing
the code or creating a new one.
To create a security code for each
phone:
When you set a security code for a
phone, you will be asked to enter the
security code every time you select
the phone on the Phone screen.
3. Enter a 4-digit security code, reenter it.
1. Select ‘‘Security Code’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select the phone you want to add a
security code to.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
506
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:42:22 31TK8600_512
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Automatic Transferring
Automatic Answering
To clear the system
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
You can choose when the HFL
system automatically answers
incoming calls.
This operation clears the security
codes, paired phones, all stored voice
tags, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Push the selector knob to turn it
on or off. The default setting is On.
2. Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2 seconds,’’ ‘‘5
seconds,’’ or ‘‘10 seconds.’’ The
default setting is Off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
1. Select ‘‘System Clear’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
CONTINUED
507
10/07/17 10:42:31 31TK8600_513
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Automatic Import Cellular
Phonebook and Call History
(available on some phones)
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically imported to
HFL.
Up to three category icons appear
next to the phonebook entries*.
Preference
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Voice
Work
Other
Pager
Message
Edit Speed Dial
The first six speed dial entries
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
* : Available on some phones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
508
2011 Odyssey
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be
stored per phone.
The first six speed dials are linked to
the audio preset buttons while in the
Phone screen.
10/07/17 10:42:43 31TK8600_514
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
to store a voice tag for the number
using the TALK button. Follow
the prompts.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Store Speed dial.’’
3. Select a number on the speed dial
list where you want to store the
number.
You can also select speed dial
directly from the Phone screen.
Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field, and
continue following step 4.
NOTE: You can also store a speed
dial number through the ‘‘Speed
Dial’’ option on the Phone screen.
To store a speed dial number during a
call:
1. Press and hold the desired audio
preset button during a call.
4. Choose a number:
By Phonebook − the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook
2. The contact information for the
active call will be stored for the
preset button.
By Call History − the last 20
numbers
By Manual Entry − manual
number input
5. When the speed dial number is
successfully stored, you are asked
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
509
Features
When a voice tag is stored for the
entry, you can dial the entry by voice.
Press the TALK button and say
‘‘Call’’ and the stored name.
10/07/17 10:42:53 31TK8600_515
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial
number:
To delete a voice tag:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’
2. Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’
3. Select the number you want to
delete the voice tag for.
3. Select the number you want to
store a voice tag for.
4. Follow the prompts to complete
the voice tag.
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
longer name. For example, use
‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
510
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:43:04 31TK8600_516
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To delete a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any
phone number, using the imported
phonebook, using the call history, or
with speed dial entries, or by redial.
To make a call using a name in the
Phonebook:
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook are
automatically imported to HFL.
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete.
1. Select ‘‘Phonebook’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select a name from the list.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
511
10/07/17 10:43:13 31TK8600_517
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
3. Push the selector knob to list the
number or numbers stored for the
selected name.
To make a call using a phone number:
To make a call using Call History:
HISTORY LIST
4. Select a number and push the
selector knob to begin automatic
dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the Phone
screen.
1. Select ‘‘Call History’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Enter the phone number, and
select
.
2. Call History is sorted by ‘‘All Calls,’’
‘‘Received Calls,’’ ‘‘Dialed Calls,’’
and ‘‘Missed Calls.’’ Selecting a
number begins automatic dialing.
NOTE: Some phones do not support
‘‘All Calls.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
512
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:43:20 31TK8600_518
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
To make a call using Speed Dial:
To make a call using Redial:
Select ‘‘Redial’’ from the Phone
screen or press and hold the PICKUP button to redial the last number
dialed in your phone’s history.
Features
PRESET BUTTONS
The first six speed dial entries are
linked to the audio preset buttons
while in the Phone screen. Press the
corresponding button to begin
automatic dialing.
2. A list of up to 20 stored speed dial
entries is shown. Select the entry
you want to call, and push
SELECT to begin automatic
dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Speed Dial’’ on the Phone
screen.
NOTE: Any voice-tagged speed dial
entry can be dialed by voice from
any screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
513
10/07/17 10:43:30 31TK8600_519
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, a
notification appears on the screen
(see page 497 ).
During a Call
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
Example
To answer the call, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel.
* : Available on some phones
To end or decline the call, press the
HANG-UP button.
The following options are available
during a call:
Transfer − Allows you to transfer a
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
Mute − Allows you to mute your
voice.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
514
Dial Tones* − Allows you to send
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:43:37 31TK8600_520
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, a
beep sounds for an incoming call.
Press and release the PICK-UP
button to put the original call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
515
Features
To return to the original call, press
the PICK-UP button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HANG-UP button.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
10/07/17 10:43:48 31TK8600_521
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL)
allows you to place and receive
phone calls using either the
navigation system controls or voice
commands without the distraction of
handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
Interface Dial
CANCEL BUTTON
PHONE BUTTON
To use HFL, you need a Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. For a list of
compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature
capabilities:
In the U.S., visit handsfreelink.honda.
com or call (888) 528-7876.
In Canada, visit www.handsfreelink.ca,
or call (888) 528-7876.
U.S. model is shown.
DIAL
ENTER
Use the Interface Dial to make menu
or list selections.
To select an item on the screen, turn
the interface dial left or right to
highlight it, and then press ENTER.
To select an item that comes with
,
,
, or
icons,
push the interface selector up, down,
left, or right. InformationProvidedby:
516
2011 Odyssey
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
Press the CANCEL button to go
back to the previous screen.
10/07/17 10:44:00 31TK8600_522
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Buttons
TALK BUTTON
Voice Control Tips
PICK-UP BUTTON
MICROPHONE
Try to reduce all background
noise. If the microphone picks up
voices other than yours,
commands may be misinterpreted.
Help Feature
BACK BUTTON
For help at any time, including a list
of available options, say ‘‘Help.’’
HANG-UP BUTTON
PICK-UP Button − Press and
release to answer a call, or press to
go directly to the Phone screen.
HANG-UP Button − Press and
release to end or decline a call.
TALK Button − Press and release
to give a command.
−
BACK Button Press and release
to go back to the previous command,
or cancel the command.
Air or wind noise from the
dashboard and side vents and all
windows may interfere with the
microphone. Adjust or close them
as necessary.
Language Selection
Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to change the
system’s language between English,
French, and Spanish.
Press and release the Talk button
each time you want to make a
command. After the beep, speak in
a clear, natural tone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
517
Features
To change the volume level of
HFL, use the audio system volume
knob or the steering wheel volume
controls.
10/07/17 10:44:08 31TK8600_523
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Display
On the navigation screen:
When you receive an incoming call,
you will see the following displays
and notifications.
On the Phone screen:
SIGNAL STRENGTH
ROAM STATUS
BLUETOOTH INDICATOR
You will see ‘‘HANDSFREELINK’’
on the audio display while HFL is in
use.
U.S. model is shown.
BATTERY LEVEL STATUS
CALL NAME PHONE DIALING
Some phones may send battery,
signal strength, and roaming status
information to the screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
518
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:44:14 31TK8600_524
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
How to Use HFL
The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Display the last 20 incoming, outgoing, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Dial
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Receive
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Missed
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the system via HFL.)
Features
All
Call History
Phone
Phonebook
Dial
More
Speed Dial
Display the paired phone’s previously imported phonebook (or import a new one).
Enter a phone number to dial.
Displays a list of all 20 speed dial entries. The first 4 speed dial numbers are shown on the
Phone screen.
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
519
10/07/17 10:44:19 31TK8600_525
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Add New Phone
Connect
Connection
Disconnect
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Phone
Delete
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pass-key
Phone
Setup
Edit
Speed Dial
Create a Pass-key number for a paired phone.
Store
Speed Dial
Select a number from the Call History, Phonebook, or manual entry
to store as a speed dial number.
Delete
Speed Dial
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete Voice Tag
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
520
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:44:23 31TK8600_526
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Phone
Phone
Setup
Create a phone name/PIN number for a paired phone.
Auto Transfer
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Auto Answer
Set incoming calls to be automatically answered.
Clear Phone
Information
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, speed dials, and pass-keys.
Voice commands can be used for all above options.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Press and release the Talk button each time you give a command.
2011 Odyssey
Features
Phone Name/
PIN
CONTINUED
521
10/07/17 10:44:30 31TK8600_527
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To use HFL, you need to pair your
Bluetooth-compatible cell phone to
the system.
Phone Screen
HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which
means, the maximum range between
your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10
meters).
Push the selector down for
PHONE SETUP.
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button to go to the Phone screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
522
2011 Odyssey
Phone Setup
You can set up your phone and other
system options with this menu.
10/07/17 10:44:37 31TK8600_528
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Setup Bluetooth Phone
To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system):
Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system starts pairing
when there is no phone paired to the
system.
Features
1. Press the PHONE button or PICKUP button. The system prompts
you to pair a phone. Select ‘‘Yes’’
on the confirmation screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
2. Make sure your phone is set to
discoverable or visibility is ON,
and select ‘‘OK.’’ HFL begins to
search for your phone.
CONTINUED
523
10/07/17 10:44:48 31TK8600_529
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To pair a cell phone (when there are one
or more phones paired to the system):
U.S. model is shown.
3. If your phone is found, it is
displayed on the screen. Select it
and press ENTER.
5. HFL gives you a 4-digit pass-key
that you will need to input on your
phone.
4. If your phone doesn’t appear on
the list, select ‘‘Phone not found?’’
and search for Bluetooth devices
using your phone. From your
phone, select ‘‘HandsFreeLink.’’
6. When your phone prompts you,
input the 4-digit pass-key.
7. You will receive a notification on
the screen and your phone if
pairing is successful.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
524
2011 Odyssey
1. Select ‘‘Phone Setup’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. Select ‘‘Add New Phone.’’
10/07/17 10:44:58 31TK8600_530
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Phone pairing tips
To change the pass-key setting:
You cannot pair your phone while
the vehicle is moving.
Up to six phones can be paired.
4. Select one of the six entries on the
list. Make sure your phone is set
to discoverable or visibility is ON.
Features
Your phone’s battery may drain
faster when it is paired to HFL.
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
5. Follow steps 2 through 7 from the
previous page.
2. Select ‘‘Pass-key.’’
NOTE: The default pass-key ‘‘0000’’
is used until you change the setting.
For a randomly generated pass-key
each time you pair a phone, select
‘‘Random.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
525
10/07/17 10:45:07 31TK8600_531
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Example
To delete a paired phone:
TRASH ICON
Push the selector to left to delete.
To create your own pass-key, select
‘‘Fixed’’ and follow steps 3 and 4.
3. Delete the current pass-key.
4. Enter a new pass-key, and select
‘‘OK.’’
BLUETOOTH ICON
1. Select ‘‘Connection’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete.’’
3. Select the phone you want to
delete. The Bluetooth icon shows
you the currently linked phone.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue. InformationProvidedby:
526
2011 Odyssey
5. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
10/07/17 10:45:17 31TK8600_532
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To name a phone:
Phone Name/PIN
You can name up to six HFL phone
names. Each can be PIN protected,
and have its own phonebook, speed
dial, and call history.
Select a phone name.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select the phone name you want to
edit on the phone name/PIN
screen.
If the phone name you selected is
PIN-protected, the speed dial list
becomes ‘‘****.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Phone Name.’’
3. Enter a phone name, and select
‘‘OK’’ when complete.
CONTINUED
527
10/07/17 10:45:26 31TK8600_533
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To create a PIN for each phone:
When you set a PIN for a phone, you
will be asked to enter the PIN every
time you select the phone on the
Phone screen.
If you select ‘‘DO NOT USE PIN,’’
before entering any number, the
phone will not have a PIN.
If the phone is already PIN-protected,
you need to enter the current PIN
before creating a new one.
1. Select ‘‘Phone Name/PIN’’ from
the Phone Setup screen.
Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you
are on the phone, the call can be
automatically transferred to HFL
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Transfer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘PIN.’’
2. Select ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’
3. Enter a 4-digit PIN, re-enter it, and
select ‘‘OK.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
528
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:45:37 31TK8600_534
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Answering
To clear the phone information
You can choose when the HFL
system automatically answers
incoming calls.
Clearing a phone name will clear all
settings, such as call history and
phonebook.
Features
1. Select ‘‘Clear Phone Information’’
from the Phone Setup screen.
2. Select the phone you want to clear.
1. Select ‘‘Auto Answer’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
3. A trash icon appears next to the
selected phone. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
2. Select ‘‘Off,’’ ‘‘2sec,’’ ‘‘5sec,’’ or
‘‘10sec.’’
4. Select ‘‘Yes’’ from the
confirmation screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
529
10/07/17 10:45:46 31TK8600_535
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
Automatic Import Cellular
Phonebook and Call History
(available on some phones)
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook and call
history are automatically imported to
HFL.
Up to three category icons appear
next to the phonebook entries*.
Preference
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Voice
Work
Other
Edit Speed Dial
The first four speed dial entries.
Pager
These indicate how many numbers
are stored for the name. If a name
has more than three category icons,
‘‘…’’ is displayed.
* : Available on some phones
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
530
2011 Odyssey
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be
stored per phone name, and the first
four numbers are displayed on the
Phone screen.
Select a ‘‘No Entry’’ field to store a
speed dial entry, or use the following
procedure.
10/07/17 10:45:55 31TK8600_536
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
5. When the speed dial number is
successfully stored, you are asked
to store a voice tag for the number.
Follow the prompts.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Store Speed dial.’’
4. Choose a number from:
Phonebook − the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook
Call History − the last 20
numbers
Dial − manual number input
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
531
Features
When a voice tag is stored for the
entry, you can dial the number by
saying ‘‘Call’’ and the voice tag name.
3. Select a number on the speed dial
list where you want to store the
number.
10/07/17 10:46:06 31TK8600_537
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial
number:
To delete a voice tag:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Voice Tag.’’
2. Select ‘‘Store Voice Tag.’’
3. Select the number you want to
delete the voice tag for.
3. Select the number you want to
store a voice tag for.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
4. Follow the prompts to complete
the voice tag.
NOTE:
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a
longer name. For example, use
‘‘John Smith’’ instead of ‘‘John.’’
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
532
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:46:16 31TK8600_538
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To delete a speed dial number:
1. Select ‘‘Edit Speed Dial’’ from the
Phone Setup screen.
2. Select ‘‘Delete Speed Dial.’’
Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any
phone number, using the imported
phonebook, using the call history, or
with speed dial entries.
To make a call using a name in the
Phonebook:
When your phone is paired, the
contents of its phonebook are
automatically imported to HFL.
Features
3. Select the number you want to
delete, and push ENTER.
4. A trash icon appears next to the
selected numbers. Select ‘‘OK’’ to
continue.
1. Select ‘‘Phonebook’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Select a name from the list.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
533
10/07/17 10:46:26 31TK8600_539
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
3. Push ENTER to list the number or
numbers stored for the selected
name.
To make a call using a phone number:
To make a call using Call History:
HISTORY LIST
4. Select a number and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
1. Select ‘‘Dial’’ from the Phone
screen.
1. Select ‘‘Call History’’ from the
Phone screen.
2. Enter the phone number, and
select ‘‘Dial.’’
2. Call History is sorted by ‘‘All,’’
‘‘Dial,’’ ‘‘Receive,’’ and ‘‘Missed.’’
Selecting a number begins
automatic dialing.
To enter the phone number by voice,
say it in a continuous string.
NOTE: Some phones do not support
‘‘All’’ in the Call History.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
534
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:46:36 31TK8600_540
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
To make a call using Speed Dial:
SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON
To make a call using More Speed Dial:
1. Select ‘‘More Speed Dial’’ on the
Phone screen.
NOTE: Any voice-tagged speed dial
entry can be dialed by voice from
any screen.
To answer the call, press the
PICK-UP button on the steering
wheel.
To end or decline the call, press the
HANG-UP button.
VOICE TAG ICON
To make a call using Redial:
Select one of the four entries on the
Phone screen, and push ENTER to
begin automatic dialing.
Press and hold the PICK-UP button
to redial the last number dialed in
your phone’s history. While the
display showing Phone screen, you
can also redial by pressing and
holding ENTER.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
535
Features
2. A list of 20 stored speed dial
entries is shown. Select the entry
you want to call, and push ENTER
to begin automatic dialing.
Receiving a Call
When you receive a call, a
notification appears on the screen
(see page 518 ).
10/07/17 10:46:44 31TK8600_541
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
During a Call
Example
Transfer − Allows you to transfer a
call from HFL to your phone, or
from your phone to HFL.
Mute − Allows you to mute your
voice.
* : Available on some phones
The following options are available
during a call:
Dial Tones* − Allows you to send
numbers or names during a call. This
is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
536
2011 Odyssey
Call Waiting
If your phone has Call Waiting, press
and release the PICK-UP button to
put the original call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
To return to the original call, press
the PICK-UP button again. If you
don’t want to answer the incoming
call, disregard it and continue with
your original call. If you want to hang
up the original call and answer the
new call, press the HANG-UP button.
10/07/17 10:46:50 31TK8600_542
Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will
interrupt Bluetooth Audio when it is
playing. Audio will resume when the
call is ended.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
537
Features
Bluetooth Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth name and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
10/07/17 10:46:52 31TK8600_543
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
538
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:46:56 31TK8600_544
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 540
Fuel Recommendation .................. 540
Service Station Procedures .......... 541
Refueling..................................... 541
Opening and Closing the
Hood ........................................ 544
Oil Check .................................... 545
Engine Coolant Check .............. 545
Fuel Economy ................................ 546
Accessories and Modifications .... 549
Carrying Cargo .............................. 551
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
539
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
10/07/17 10:47:05 31TK8600_545
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend using quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits. In
addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain harmful
manganese-based fuel additives such
as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
540
2011 Odyssey
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service. Some
gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol. Your
vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to
10% ethanol by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol. If you
notice any undesirable operating
symptoms, try another service
station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
10/07/17 10:47:11 31TK8600_546
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
For further important fuel-related
information for your vehicle, or
information on gasoline that does not
contain MMT, visit Owner Link at
owners.honda.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional
information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit
Refueling
Pull
www.toptiergas.com.
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
541
Before Driving
Because the level of detergency and
additives in gasoline vary in the
market, Honda endorses the use of
‘‘TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline’’
where available to help maintain the
performance and reliability of your
vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline
standard jointly established by
leading automotive manufacturers to
meet the needs of today’s advanced
engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers
will, in most cases, identify their
gasoline as having met ‘‘TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline’’ standards at the
retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper
level of detergent additives and be
free of metallic additives. The proper
level of detergent additives, and
absence of harmful metallic additives
in gasoline, help avoid build-up of
deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
10/07/17 10:47:18 31TK8600_547
Service Station Procedures
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle under the lower left
corner of the dashboard.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. This
leaves some room in the fuel tank
for the fuel to expand with
temperature changes.
TETHER
Before opening the fuel fill door,
make sure the rear sliding door on
the driver’s side is closed.
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
FUEL FILL CAP
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
542
2011 Odyssey
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery system.
The system helps keep fuel vapor
from going into the atmosphere. Try
filling at another pump. If this does
not fix the problem, consult your
dealer.
10/07/19 15:59:07 31TK8600_548
Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once.
Tighten Fuel Cap Message
On Touring models
Except Touring models
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display (see page 82 ).
On Touring models
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the multi-information
display. Turn the engine off, and
confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If
it is, loosen it, then retighten it until
it clicks at least once. The message
should go offInfafter
days of
or
mat
i
onPseveral
r
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 671 .
CONTINUED
543
Before Driving
If you do not properly tighten the
cap, you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN
FUEL CAP’’ message on the
multi-information display.
normal driving once you tighten or
replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to
another message, press the INFO
button. The ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’
message will appear each time you
restart the engine until the system
turns the message off.
10/07/17 10:47:36 31TK8600_549
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
GRIP
SUPPORT ROD
Pull
LATCH
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Slide this handle to the right to
release the hood. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,
or you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
544
2011 Odyssey
CLIP
3. Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
10/07/17 10:47:47 31TK8600_550
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Engine Coolant Check
RESERVE TANK
UPPER MARK
DIPSTICK
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 614 .
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
MAX
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 618 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 611 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
545
Before Driving
LOWER MARK
10/07/17 10:47:56 31TK8600_551
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits, and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in light traffic. A range of
miles per gallon achieved is also
provided.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
546
City MPG
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit
www.fueleconomy.gov
(Canada: Visit vehicles.gc.ca)
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per yearInmultiplied
by the cost
f
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
www.
10/07/17 10:48:09 31TK8600_552
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multiinformation display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 611 ).
For example:
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
614).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An underinflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel economy at speeds above
45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms
per liter).
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
547
Before Driving
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
10/07/17 10:48:18 31TK8600_553
Fuel Economy
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Calculating Fuel Economy
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles
(kilometers).
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
548
2011 Odyssey
L per
100 km
10/07/17 10:48:27 31TK8600_554
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 673 ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
549
Before Driving
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Before installing any accessory:
10/07/17 10:48:34 31TK8600_555
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Here are some examples:
Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling, stability, and
reliability.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety systems could make the
systems ineffective.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
550
2011 Odyssey
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
10/07/17 10:48:43 31TK8600_556
Carrying Cargo
DOOR POCKETS
REMOVABLE CENTER CONSOLE*
COIN BOX
UTILITY
TRAY
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets*
Center pocket
Utility tray
Coin box
Removable center console*
Roof-rack (if installed)
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETS*
CARGO AREA
* : If equipped
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
551
Before Driving
Rear cargo area, including the
second row seats when removed,
and the third row seat when folded
flat
10/07/17 10:48:54 31TK8600_557
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,340 lbs (608 kg).
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Label Example
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg orInXXX
f
or
mat
i
onlbs.
Pr
ovi
dedby:
552
2011 Odyssey
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
10/07/17 10:49:06 31TK8600_558
Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
(1,040 lbs)
(472 kg)
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
(68 kg x 4 = 272 kg)
Cargo Weight
(740 lbs)
(336 kg)
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
(590 lbs)
(268 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Before Driving
Max Load (1,340 lbs)
(608 kg)
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Max load on EX-L and Touring models is used in the Examples.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
553
10/07/17 10:49:13 31TK8600_559
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the pedals, the seat operation, or
the proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
If you remove or fold the rear
seats down, tie down items that
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a crash or sudden stop.
Also, keep all cargo below the
bottom of the windows. If it is
higher than the windows, it could
interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 58 .
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
554
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:49:20 31TK8600_560
Carrying Cargo
If you place items near the rear
windows, be sure they are below
the bottom of the windows. If
cargo is higher, it could interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Grocery Bag Hooks
Front
HOOK
Your vehicle has grocery bag hooks
on the instrument panel and at the
bottom of the third row seat-back in
the cargo area.
To use the front bag hook, push it
out.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
555
Before Driving
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
10/07/17 10:49:25 31TK8600_561
Carrying Cargo
Rear
Cargo Hooks
HOOKS
The hooks are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook.
To secure the cargo, you can use the
four cargo hooks in the cargo area.
The illustration shows the location of
each cargo hook.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
556
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:49:29 31TK8600_562
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA ) system, the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS), and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
557
Driving
Preparing to Drive ......................... 558
Starting the Engine........................ 559
Check Starter System
Message .................................. 560
Automatic Transmission............... 561
Parking ............................................ 566
Braking System.............................. 567
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 568
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),
aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System ......... 570
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 572
Blind Spot Information System
(BSI) ............................................ 579
Towing a Trailer ............................ 588
Towing Your Vehicle .................... 595
10/07/17 10:49:39 31TK8600_563
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
pages 175 and 176 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
pages 197 and 198 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 143 ).
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
8. Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
558
2011 Odyssey
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 15 ).
10.When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel, and the
messages on the information
display or multi-information
display (depending on models)
(see pages 63 , 64 , 77 , and
90 ).
10/07/17 10:49:46 31TK8600_564
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle’s starter system has an
auto control mode. When you turn
the ignition switch to the START
(III) position, this feature keeps the
engine’s starter motor running until
the engine starts. Follow these
instructions to start the engine:
1. Apply the parking brake.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 10 seconds before trying
again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. See
Immobilizer System on page 145 .
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
559
Driving
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, then
release the ignition switch. You do
not need to hold the ignition
switch in the START (III) position
to start the engine. The starter
motor runs until the engine starts
or a maximum of 10−25 seconds
depending on engine coolant
temperature.
10/07/17 10:49:51 31TK8600_565
Starting the Engine
Check Starter System Message
On Touring models
If this message is on, the ignition
switch has to be held in the START
(III) position manually until the
engine starts. The ignition switch
can be held in that position up to 15
seconds.
Even though you may be able to
start the engine manually without
the auto control mode of the starting
system, have your vehicle inspected
by a dealer.
If there is a problem with the starter
system, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
STARTER SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON (II) position. You will also see
this message when the auto control
mode of the starter system has a
problem.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
560
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:49:58 31TK8600_566
Automatic Transmission
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
Shift Lever Position Indicators
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
On Touring models
When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of a
possible problem with the
transmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECK
TRANSMISSION’’ message on the
multi-information display (see page
92 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
561
Driving
On Touring models
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
10/07/17 10:50:05 31TK8600_567
Automatic Transmission
Shifting
Except Touring models
To shift from:
P to R
RELEASE BUTTON
(Depending
on models)
SHIFT LEVER
R to P
N to R
D to L
L to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
D3 to D
D to D3
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
Press the D3 button.
To shift from Park to any position,
press firmly on the brake pedal, and
press the release button on the front
of the shift lever, then move the
lever. You cannot shift out of Park
when the ignition switch is in the
LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
562
2011 Odyssey
On Touring models
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to L
L to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
D4 to D
D to D4
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
Press the D4 button.
10/07/17 10:50:12 31TK8600_568
Automatic Transmission
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the front of the shift lever
to move it.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Drive (D) − Use this position for
normal driving. The transmission
automatically selects a suitable gear
for your speed and acceleration.
Except Touring models
Drive (D3) − To use D3, press the
D3 button when the shift lever is in
the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is similar to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D3 can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
CONTINUED
563
Driving
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 565 .
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and the release button on the
front of the shift lever to shift from
Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop, and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
10/07/17 10:50:16 31TK8600_569
Automatic Transmission
On Touring models
Drive (D4) − To use D4, press the
D4 button when the shift lever is in
the ‘‘D’’ position. This position is
similar to D, except only the first
four gears are selected instead of all
six. Use D4 when towing a trailer in
hilly terrain, or to provide engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
D4 can also keep the transmission
from cycling between fourth and
fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.
Low (L) − To shift to Low, press
the release button on the front of the
shift lever. Use Low to make better
use of engine power when climbing,
and for maximum engine braking
when going down steep hills.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
564
2011 Odyssey
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
10/07/17 10:50:26 31TK8600_570
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
RELEASE BUTTON
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Insert
the key into the ignition switch,
press the brake pedal, and restart
the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
565
Driving
COVER
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover to
prevent scratches. Using a small
flat-tip screwdriver or a metal
fingernail file, carefully pry on the
notch of the cover to remove it.
10/07/17 10:50:35 31TK8600_571
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
On all models except LX
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
566
2011 Odyssey
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
10/07/17 10:50:43 31TK8600_572
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The emergency
brake assist system increases the
stopping force when you depress the
brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system
(ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
567
Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, reduces their effectiveness and
reduces brake pad life. In addition,
fuel economy can be reduced. It also
keeps your brake lights on all the
time, confusing drivers behind you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
10/07/17 10:50:50 31TK8600_573
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
On Touring models
You should never pump the brake pedal.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 91 ).
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 672 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
568
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:50:55 31TK8600_574
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 672 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.
Driving
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
569
10/07/17 10:51:06 31TK8600_575
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA system indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
VSA OFF Indicator
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA system indicator blink.
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
NOTE: The main function of the
VSA system is generally known as
Electronic Stability Control (ESC).
The system also includes a traction
control function.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
570
2011 Odyssey
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 571 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it does not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
10/07/17 10:51:15 31TK8600_576
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA OFF Switch
VSA OFF SWITCH
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
When VSA is off, the VSA OFF
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 647 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
571
Driving
Touring Elite and
Canadian Touring models
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
10/07/17 10:51:23 31TK8600_577
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Except Touring models
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 655 ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon
as
possible.
I
nf
or
ma
t
i
onP
r
ovi
dedby:
572
2011 Odyssey
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
10/07/17 10:51:31 31TK8600_578
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Refer to page 642 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 643 ).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 571 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
573
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
10/07/17 10:51:38 31TK8600_579
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 655 ).
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
574
2011 Odyssey
On Touring models
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
10/07/17 10:51:45 31TK8600_580
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
When the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator is on, one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated.
You should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure as indicated
on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE’’ message on the multiinformation display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
575
Driving
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator may come on unexpectedly.
10/07/17 10:51:51 31TK8600_581
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The TPMS can misinterpret the tire
pressure because of differences in
air temperature. For example, if you
check and fill your tires in a warm
area, then drive in extremely cold
weather, the tire pressure will be
lower than measured and could be
underinflated and cause the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on. Or, if you check and adjust your
tire pressure in cooler conditions,
and drive into extremely hot
conditions, the tires may become
overinflated. However, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator will not
come on if the tires are overinflated.
Refer to page 642 for tire inflation
guidelines.
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
this indicator begins to flash. It stops
flashing after approximately 1
minute, then stays on. You will also
see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 91 ).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 643 ).
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 655 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
576
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:52:00 31TK8600_582
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
TPMS System Failure
Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator begins to flash, then stays
on (see page 573 ).
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on, or the multiinformation display shows a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message,
the VSA system automatically turns
on even when the VSA system is
turned off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch (see page 571 ). If this
happens, you cannot turn the VSA
system off by pressing the VSA OFF
switch again.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
system message will also be
displayed on the multi-information
display after several miles
(kilometers) driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator will come
on. Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 655 ).
After the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the low tire pressure/
TPMS indicator stays on while
driving. After several miles
(kilometers) driving, this indicator
begins to flash, then stays on again.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display. This is normal;
the system cannot monitor the spare
tire pressure. Manually check the
spare tire pressure to be sure it is
correct.
CONTINUED
577
Driving
If there is a problem with the TPMS,
you will see the above message on
the multi-information display.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
10/07/17 10:52:06 31TK8600_583
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
This indicator and the warning
message on the multi-information
display will go off, after several miles
(kilometers) driving, when the spare
tire is replaced with the specified
regular tire equipped with the tire
pressure monitor sensor.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator and the low tire position on
the low tire pressure monitor do not
go out after inflating the tires to the
specified values, have your dealer
check the system as soon as possible.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
a qualified technician.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
578
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:52:11 31TK8600_584
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
Failure to visually confirm that it
is safe to change lanes before
doing so may result in a crash
and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on the blind
spot information system when
changing lanes.
On Touring Elite and Canadian Touring
models
The blind spot information system
(BSI) is designed to assist you when
you are changing lanes.
If the system detects vehicles in
adjacent lanes, it automatically
illuminates the appropriate indicator
to provide assistance when you
change lanes. It is not a substitute
for visual confirmation that it is safe
to change lanes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
579
Driving
Always look in your mirrors, to
either side of your vehicle, and
behind you for other vehicles
before changing lanes.
10/07/17 10:52:19 31TK8600_585
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
When BSI detects a vehicle in an
alert zone, a BSI alert indicator
comes on near the corresponding
outside rearview mirror.
BSI System Operation
ALERT
ZONE
A
B
C
A: Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m)
B: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
C: Approximately 10 ft. (3 m)
BSI system is designed to detect
vehicles in specified alert zones
adjacent to your vehicle, particularly
in harder to see areas commonly
known as ‘‘blind spots.’’
While your vehicle is moving
forward at a speed between 6 mph
(10 km/h) and 100 mph (160 km/h),
the BSI alert indicator comes on
under either of the following
conditions:
Another vehicle overtakes you,
entering the alert zone from
behind, at a speed that differs
from your vehicle’s speed by no
more than 31 mph (50 km/h).
You pass a vehicle at a speed that
differs from that vehicle’s speed
by no more than 12 mph (20
km/h). The indicator comes on
approximately 2 seconds after the
vehicle enters the alert zone.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
580
2011 Odyssey
The system will not alert you to all
vehicles in blind spot zones (such as
vehicles you have just passed which
you should already be aware of)
unless it remains in the alert zone for
approximately 2 or more seconds.
While the system is on, BSI is active
whenever the shift lever is in the D
or D4 position.
10/07/17 10:52:23 31TK8600_586
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
Driving
BSI ALERT INDICATOR
LEFT SIDE
RIGHT SIDE
BSI OFF BUTTON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
2011 Odyssey
581
10/07/17 10:52:29 31TK8600_587
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
LEVER
Impacts to the radar sensors or the
area around them can affect system
performance. If an impact occurs,
have the system checked by your
dealer.
INDICATOR
ILLUMINATE
BLINK
The BSI alert indicator starts to blink
as a reminder if you move the turn
signal lever in the direction of the
detected vehicle.
Radar sensors, located underneath
each corner of the rear bumper,
detect objects. Do not cover this area
with labels or stickers of any kind.
Always keep this area free of any
kind of dirt every time you get in the
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
582
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:52:37 31TK8600_588
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
Important Precautions
Like all assistance systems, BSI has
limitations. Over-reliance on BSI may
result in a collision. Always look in
your mirrors, to either side of your
vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
The system should be turned off
when towing a trailer. Due to the
added mass and resulting changes in
radar coverage, the system cannot
operate as intended, and detection of
the trailer itself by the radar sensors
may cause the BSI alert indicators to
illuminate.
Limitations
The BSI alert indicators may not
illuminate under the following
circumstances:
The speed difference between
your vehicle and a vehicle
approaching from behind is
greater than 31 mph (50 km/h).
A vehicle is parked in a side lane.
An object not detected by the
radar sensors approaches or
passes your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
583
Driving
The speed difference between
your vehicle and the vehicle you
are passing is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
10/07/19 14:54:53 31TK8600_589
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI may be adversely affected under
the following circumstances:
EXAMPLES
GUARD RAIL
POLE OR TREE
When objects such as guard rails,
poles, trees, etc., are detected.
When an object that doesn’t
reflect radio waves well, such as a
motorcycle, is in the alert zone.
A vehicle is behind or approaching
your vehicle while on a curved
road.
When towing a trailer.
MOTORCYCLE
: BSI Alert indicator is on
: BSI Alert indicator is off
A vehicle is moving from a far lane
to the adjacent lane.
The orientation of the sensors has
been changed.
The system picks up external
electrical interference.
Bad weather conditions, such as
heavy rain, snow and fog.
The rear bumper has been
deformed, or improperly repaired.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
584
2011 Odyssey
The system is for your convenience.
Even if an object is within the alert
zone, the system may not detect it,
depending on its shape.
Always look in your mirrors, to
either side of your vehicle, and
behind you for other vehicles before
changing lanes.
10/07/17 10:52:52 31TK8600_590
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI OFF Button
To turn the system on again, press
the same button. The BSI indicator
on the instrument panel turns off.
The multi-information display
indicates that the system is on.
When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, the system will
be in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting.
Driving
To turn the system off, press the BSI
OFF button when the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. The BSI
indicator on the instrument panel
glows amber, indicating that the
system is turned off. The multiinformation display indicates that the
system is off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
585
10/07/17 10:53:01 31TK8600_591
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
BSI Status Displays
System
Status
ON
Multi-Information
Display Message
BSI Indicator
−
Description
When you push the BSI OFF button, a BSI ON or OFF message is displayed on the multiinformation display for about 5 seconds.
The BSI indicator will remain on while the system is off.
A chime sounds to indicate that the system has been turned ON or OFF.
OFF
ON/OFF*
OFF
586
If while driving, mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of sensor:
The system may shut down
The BSI indicator illuminates, a message is displayed on the multi-information display, and a
chime sounds.
The BSI indicator will turn off and the system will return to normal once the obstacle is removed,
and you begin to drive.
Always keep the area around the radar sensors clean. BSI may not operate properly if the sensors
are obstructed.
The BSI alert indicator:
May come on when a vehicle enters one of the alert zones, even if this message is displayed.
May not come on due to obstruction (splashes, etc.) even if this message is not displayed.
*: System status may remain on even when the BLIND SPOT NOT AVAILABLE message is
displayed.
If the system is faulty, the BSI indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Have your vehicle
inspected
by your Honda dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:53:05 31TK8600_592
Blind Spot Information System (BSI)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Driving
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
587
10/07/17 10:53:12 31TK8600_593
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Load Limits
Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 540 ).
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
depends on several factors. See page
589 for the driving limits for your
towing situation. Towing a load that
is too heavy can seriously affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance.
It can also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
588
2011 Odyssey
Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
10/07/17 10:53:19 31TK8600_594
Towing a Trailer
Number of Occupants*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*:
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Equipped with ATF cooler
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)
3,200 lbs (1,451 kg)
3,050 lbs (1,383 kg)
2,900 lbs (1,315 kg)
1,450 lbs (658 kg)
Towing is Not Recommended.
To achieve a proper tongue load, start by loading 60% of the load toward the
front of the trailer and 40% toward the rear, then re-adjust the load as needed.
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,910 lbs (1,320 kg) on the front axle,
and 3,197 lbs (1,450 kg) on the rear
axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is
8,477 lbs (3,845 kg).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
589
Driving
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the
back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (68 kg), and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cargo area.
Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces the maximum trailer weight and
maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 6,019 lbs
(2,730 kg).
10/07/17 10:53:25 31TK8600_595
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and meets federal, state,
province, and local regulations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
590
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment,
depending on the size of your trailer,
how much load you are towing, and
where you tow. To ensure the best
quality, we recommend that you
purchase Honda equipment
whenever possible.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:53:34 31TK8600_596
Towing a Trailer
Hitches
Safety Chains
Sway Control
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody,
using the six threaded holes
provided. A hitch and the required
fluid coolers designed especially for
your Odyssey can be obtained from
your Honda dealer.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
A sway control device helps
minimize swaying that can occur in
crosswinds and in normal and
emergency driving maneuvers. If
you experience swaying when
pulling your trailer, consult the
trailer maker for the specific type of
device and how to install it properly.
Weight Distributing Hitch
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Cooler
An additional ATF (automatic
transmission fluid) cooler should be
installed. This device will help
prevent automatic transmission
overheating, which could cause
serious damage. The additional ATF
cooler can be obtained from your
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
591
Driving
Your vehicle is designed to tow
without the need for a load
distributing hitch. If you wish to use
one, please consult your trailer
maker for proper installation and setup. Improper set-up could degrade
the handling, stability, and braking
performance of your vehicle.
10/07/17 10:53:43 31TK8600_597
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Trailer Lights
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL
TRAILER HAZARD
LIGHT
SMALL LIGHT
BACKUP LIGHT
STOP LIGHT
+B SMALL LIGHT
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, provincial,
territorial, and local regulations.
Check with your local trailer dealer
or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you
plan to tow, and use only equipment
designed for your vehicle.
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
592
+B BACKUP LIGHT
2011 Odyssey
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle. You can get this
optional connector from your dealer.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
10/07/17 10:53:50 31TK8600_598
Towing a Trailer
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Additional Towing Equipment
Many states and Canadian
provinces/territories require special
outside mirrors when towing a trailer.
Even if they don’t, you should install
special mirrors if you cannot clearly
see behind you, or if the trailer
creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
593
Driving
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Spare Tires
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. If you use the compact
spare tire that came with your
vehicle, it could adversely affect
vehicle handling. See page 647 for
proper tire size, page 660 for how to
store a full size wheel and tire, and
page 655 for information on
changing a flat tire.
10/07/17 10:54:00 31TK8600_599
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension,
cooling system, and lights are in
good operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Towing Speeds and Gears
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. Do not exceed
55 mph (88 km/h). At higher speeds,
the trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
594
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:54:10 31TK8600_600
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D3 or D4 depending on models.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to L. Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and remember,
it will take longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel,
then turn the wheel to the left to get
the trailer to move to the left, and
turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page 683 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
595
Driving
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
10/07/17 10:54:12 31TK8600_601
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
596
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:54:18 31TK8600_602
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
Maintenance Minder messages on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
models), and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
597
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 707 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 598
Maintenance MinderTM.................. 599
Fluid Locations............................... 613
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 614
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 616
Engine Coolant ............................... 618
Windshield Washers ..................... 620
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 621
Brake Fluid ..................................... 623
Power Steering Fluid..................... 624
Timing Belt ..................................... 624
Lights .............................................. 625
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 636
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 636
Floor Mats ...................................... 637
Wiper Blades .................................. 638
Wheels ............................................ 642
Tires ................................................ 642
Checking the Battery .................... 649
Vehicle Storage .............................. 651
Interior Care ................................... 652
10/07/17 10:54:28 31TK8600_603
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
598
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
10/07/17 10:54:36 31TK8600_604
Maintenance MinderTM
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
models) to show you when you
should have your dealer perform
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance services.
Calculated
Engine Oil Life (%)
100% − 91%
90% − 81%
80% − 71%
70% − 61%
60% − 51%
50% − 41%
40% − 31%
30% − 21%
20% − 16%
15% − 11%
10% − 6%
5% − 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Engine Oil Life Display
Except Touring models
ENGINE OIL
LIFE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown.
SELECT/
RESET KNOB
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the select/
reset knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page 78 ).
CONTINUED
599
Maintenance
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:
10/07/17 10:54:43 31TK8600_605
Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The Maintenance Minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
near the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
U.S. model is shown.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicators remind you that your
vehicle will soon be due for
scheduled maintenance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
600
‘‘SERVICE’’ MESSAGE
2011 Odyssey
U.S. model is shown.
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
10/07/17 10:54:53 31TK8600_606
Maintenance MinderTM
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 602 ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the trip
meter. Press and release the select/
reset knob on the instrument panel.
NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
U.S. model is shown.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
U.S. model is shown.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative distance
traveled is displayed and begins to
blink after the vehicle has been
driven 10 miles (10 km) or more.
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
601
Maintenance
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the Maintenance Minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
10/07/17 10:55:03 31TK8600_607
Maintenance MinderTM
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the trip meter, press
and release the select/reset knob.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Except Touring models
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative distance traveled, the
Maintenance Minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
U.S. model is shown.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 612 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
602
2011 Odyssey
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Except Touring models
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
10/07/17 10:55:12 31TK8600_608
Maintenance MinderTM
On Touring models
OIL LIFE DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
Except LX
model
: Press and release the
select/reset knob.
U.S. model is shown.
5. Press the select/reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
4. Select the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ display by
pressing and releasing the select/
reset knob. Press the same knob
for a few seconds to enter this
setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
ENGINE OIL
INFO (▲/▼)
LIFE DISPLAY
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the INFO (▲/▼) button on the
steering wheel repeatedly, until the
engine oil life is displayed (see page
84 ).
CONTINUED
603
Maintenance
3. Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The information
display shows the reset mode
initial display as shown.
U.S. model is shown.
10/07/17 10:55:18 31TK8600_609
Maintenance MinderTM
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)
When the remaining engine oil life is
15 percent or less, the display shows
a ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) for other scheduled
maintenance items needing service.
SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
604
2011 Odyssey
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the
maintenance item code(s) along with
the engine oil life on the multiinformation display.
10/07/17 10:55:23 31TK8600_610
Maintenance MinderTM
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
The maintenance item code(s)
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 609 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is
less than 5 percent, you will see the
above display. The display then
changes to ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW.’’
Have the indicated maintenance
done as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
605
10/07/17 10:55:28 31TK8600_611
Maintenance MinderTM
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
also be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message and along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
If the indicated maintenance service
is not done and the engine oil life
reaches 0 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message
along with the maintenance item
code(s) on the multi-information
display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
606
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:55:34 31TK8600_612
Maintenance MinderTM
The system message indicator on
the instrument panel will also come
on, and a beeper will sound.
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button after canceling it.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance done by
your dealer immediately.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Maintenance
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
not be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the engine oil
life blinking and a ‘‘SERVICE’’
message along with the maintenance
item code(s) on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
607
10/07/17 10:55:41 31TK8600_613
Maintenance MinderTM
U.S.
Canada
If the indicated required service is
not done and the remaining engine
oil life becomes 0%, the multiinformation display will show a
‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,
the total distance traveled after the
remaining oil life became 0%, and the
maintenance item code(s).
The system message will appear
again by pressing the INFO (▲/▼)
button after canceling it.
U.S.
You will also see the system
message every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position until you have the indicated
maintenance performed by your
dealer.
Canada
To cancel the system message, press
and release the INFO (▲/▼) button
on the steering wheel. At this time,
the system message indicator will
not be turned off. Then the display
will change to the engine oil life
display. You will see the negative
distance traveled blinking and a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
maintenance item code(s) on the
multi-information display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
608
2011 Odyssey
Negative distance traveled means
your vehicle has passed the
maintenance required point.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 609 .
10/07/17 10:55:50 31TK8600_614
Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
On Touring models
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
On Touring models
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display the
next time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 612 .
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button on
the steering wheel until you see
the engine oil life display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 10 seconds. The
remaining engine oil life reset
mode will be shown on the multiinformation display.
CONTINUED
609
Maintenance
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the Maintenance Minder as
follows:
10/07/17 10:55:56 31TK8600_615
Maintenance MinderTM
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
correct maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
U.S. model is shown.
4. Select ‘‘RESET’’ by pressing the
INFO (▲/▼) button, then press
the SEL/RESET button to reset
the engine oil life display. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’ If you want to
cancel the oil life reset mode,
select ‘‘CANCEL.’’
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
610
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:56:05 31TK8600_616
Maintenance MinderTM
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the odometer/
trip meter display or the multiinformation display.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page 625 .
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 545 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 545 .
Maintenance
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
621 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 623 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
643 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
611
10/07/17 10:56:13 31TK8600_617
Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Symbol
1
2
3
4
*1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear within 12 months
after the display was last reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column
5
on page 611 .
NOTE:
Independent of the Maintenance Minder information, replace the brake
fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
612
2011 Odyssey
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over
110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures (under −20°F,
−29°C), replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
10/07/17 10:56:17 31TK8600_618
Fluid Locations
POWER STEERING FLUID
(Red cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOIR
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
613
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
10/07/17 10:56:23 31TK8600_619
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 0W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
614
Recommended Engine Oil
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:56:30 31TK8600_620
Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
0W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multiinformation display.
Ambient Temperature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
615
Maintenance
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
0W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle’s engine does not
require any oil additives. Additives
may adversely affect engine or
transmission performance and
durability.
10/07/17 10:56:37 31TK8600_621
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the odometer/
trip meter display or on the multiinformation display. The oil and filter
collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not
removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.
DRAIN BOLT
WASHER
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
616
OIL FILTER
2011 Odyssey
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the contacting surface
of the engine. If it is, remove it
before installing a new oil filter.
10/07/17 10:56:46 31TK8600_622
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
4. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
6. Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Maintenance
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
617
10/07/17 10:56:52 31TK8600_623
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
MAX
MIN
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent distilled
water. Never add straight antifreeze
or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
618
2011 Odyssey
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
10/07/17 10:57:00 31TK8600_624
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
FILLER NECK
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Fill up to here
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
3. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Maintenance
1. When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
up any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
619
10/07/17 10:57:08 31TK8600_625
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use. This
reservoir supplies the windshield and
rear window washers.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge attached to the cap.
LEVEL GAUGE
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 74 ).
On Canadian Touring model:
You will also see a ‘‘WASHER
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display (see page 92 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
620
2011 Odyssey
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
10/07/17 10:57:16 31TK8600_626
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Except Touring models
Touring models
Except Touring models
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick, and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
621
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
DIPSTICK
10/07/17 10:57:24 31TK8600_627
Automatic Transmission Fluid
GUIDE
Always use Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid).
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
Touring models
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks on the dipstick.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid when this
service is indicated on a maintenance
message on the information display
or on the multi-information display
(depending on models).
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
622
2011 Odyssey
Use only Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission f luid). Do not mix with
other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda ATF DW-1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
ATF DW-1 is not covered by the Honda
new vehicle warranty.
10/07/17 10:57:32 31TK8600_628
Brake Fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly.
On Touring models
You will also see the ‘‘BRAKE
FLUID LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display when the brake
fluid level is low.
Independent of the Maintenance
Minder information, replace the
brake fluid every 3 years.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
623
Maintenance
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
MAX
10/07/17 10:57:41 31TK8600_629
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
LOWER LEVEL
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spill
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
624
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Timing Belt
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
Maintenance MinderTM schedule.
Replace the timing belt every 60,000
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly
drive your vehicle in any of the
following conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Frequently towing a trailer.
10/07/17 10:57:48 31TK8600_630
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or other qualified technician.
High Voltage Discharge Tube
Headlights
On Touring Elite and Canadian Touring
models
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
CONTINUED
625
Maintenance
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take your
vehicle to a dealer to have it replaced.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
10/07/17 10:57:56 31TK8600_631
Lights
High Beam Headlights
COOLANT RESERVE TANK
STAY BRACKET
HOLDING CLIPS
STAY
1. Open the hood.
2. To change a bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the upper part of the
air intake duct.
HOLDING CLIP
To change a bulb on the
passenger’s side, use a flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the holding
clip from the engine coolant
reserve tank, and then remove the
engine coolant reserve tank out of
its stay.
Use a flat-tip screwdriver to
remove the holding clip, then
remove the upper part.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
626
2011 Odyssey
POWER STEERING RESERVOIR
Remove the power steering
reservoir from the stay bracket to
get enough working space.
10/07/17 10:58:08 31TK8600_632
Lights
BULB
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Low Beam Headlights
1. Open the hood.
BULB
TAB
6. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
TAB
7. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
CONNECTOR
Passenger’s side
Reinstall the engine coolant
reserve tank and power steering
reservoir.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
CONNECTOR
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
627
Maintenance
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
8. Driver’s side
Reinstall the air intake duct
securely.
10/07/17 10:58:18 31TK8600_633
Lights
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
1. Open the hood.
5. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
BULB
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
5. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
SOCKET
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
628
4. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:58:25 31TK8600_634
Lights
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
On Touring models
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb,
handle it by its plastic case, and
protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you
touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
1. Start the engine. If you are
replacing a driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel all the way to
the right. If you are replacing a
passenger’s side bulb, turn the
steering wheel to the left. Turn off
the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
MOUNTING BOLT
SCREWS
2. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove
the mounting bolt, and remove the
screws with a Phillips-head
screwdriver. Pull the inner fender
cover back.
CONTINUED
629
Maintenance
Halogen light bulbs get very hot when
lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on
the glass can cause the bulb to overheat
and shatter.
The fog lights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or another qualified
technician.
10/07/17 10:58:35 31TK8600_635
Lights
5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
BULB
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
7. Turn on the fog lights to test the
new bulb.
TAB
CONNECTOR
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
8. Reinstall the inner fender. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the front bumper.
9. Reinstall the screws and mounting
bolt on the inner fender cover, and
tighten them securely.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
630
2011 Odyssey
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Rear Pillar)
Pull up
Slide
MOUNTING BOLTS
1. Open the tailgate.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the two mounting bolts.
10/07/17 10:58:44 31TK8600_636
Lights
2. Rotate the assembly toward the
side panel until it slightly overlaps
the bumper and the bottom of the
taillight housing is exposed.
SNAP FASTENERS
SOCKET
3. With the hand closest to the cargo
area, use your fingers to grip the
bottom edge of the assembly.
4. Apply a rearward and upward
pulling motion to release the lower
fastener from the grommet.
BULB
6. Pull with the upper finger and
hand to release the upper fastener
from the top grommet.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
7. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight or turn
signal light.
8. Remove the socket for that bulb
by turning it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
631
Maintenance
5. Continue to support the assembly
while placing the fingers of the
outer hand on the top of the outer
corner of the assembly.
10/07/17 10:58:53 31TK8600_637
Lights
9. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
10.Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
clockwise until it locks.
11.Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Tailgate)
If the grommets are loose or completely
out of the holes af ter the taillight
assembly is removed, they must be
replaced. Ask your dealer f or more
inf ormation.
13.Insert the fasteners into the
grommets and push the assembly
back into place. You will hear the
fasteners engage.
GROMMET
14.Install the mounting bolts and
tighten securely.
COVER
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover to prevent
scratches. Remove it by carefully
prying in the notch on its edge
with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: taillight or back-up
light.
FASTENER
12.Ensure that the grommets are still
in place on the body panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
632
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 10:59:04 31TK8600_638
Lights
(Back-up light)
5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
CONNECTOR
(Taillight)
BULB
6. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
TAB
BASE GASKET
SOCKET
BULB
8. Push the electrical connector back
onto the socket. Make sure it is on
all the way.
SOCKET
9. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
10.Reinstall the cover.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
4. Remove the base gasket as shown,
then remove the socket by turning
it one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
633
Maintenance
3. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab to unlock it, then slide the
connector off the bulb.
7. Reinstall the base gasket.
10/07/17 10:59:13 31TK8600_639
Lights
5. Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
BULB
LENS SEGMENTS
6. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
7. Reinstall the cover.
SOCKET
SCREWS
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment to prevent scratches.
Remove each lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a
small flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the screws with a Phillipshead screwdriver, then remove
the light assembly from the
tailgate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
634
2011 Odyssey
3. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
10/07/17 10:59:22 31TK8600_640
Lights
5. Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
6. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Light Bulb
TABS
COVER
7. Reinstall the high-mount brake
light assembly into the tailgate.
Tighten the two screws and
reinstall the covers.
BULB
2. Remove the license light assembly
by squeezing the tabs on both
sides of the socket.
4. Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
5. Reinstall the socket. Snap the
cover back in place.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
635
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover to prevent
scratches. Remove it by carefully
prying in the notch on its edge
with a small flat-tip screwdriver.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
10/07/17 10:59:28 31TK8600_641
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Dust and Pollen Filter
Cleaning the Seat Belts
LOOP
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
636
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the climate control
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
odometer/trip meter display or on
the multi-information display. It
should be replaced every 15,000
miles (24,000 km) if you drive
primarily in urban areas that have
high concentrations of soot in the air,
or if the flow from the climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
10/07/17 10:59:36 31TK8600_642
Floor Mats
Front
Rear
To Unlock
To Unlock
To Unlock
KNOB
KNOB
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
they can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Make sure the rear floor mats are
also properly hooked. If not, the floor
mat will interfere with the seat
operation and make the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
To lock or unlock each anchor, turn
the knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
637
Maintenance
The floor mats that came with your
vehicle hook over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mats
from sliding forward (possibly
interfering with the pedals), or
backwards (making the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective).
KNOB
10/07/17 10:59:44 31TK8600_643
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.
WIPER ARMS
To replace a front wiper blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
638
2011 Odyssey
LOCK TAB
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases from
the wiper arm.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
10/07/17 10:59:51 31TK8600_644
Wiper Blades
BLADE
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
BLADE
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Maintenance
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grabbing the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
REINFORCEMENT
CONTINUED
639
10/07/17 10:59:59 31TK8600_645
Wiper Blades
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
WIPER ARM
To replace a rear wiper blade:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
3. Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
Slide the blade out of the holder.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
640
2011 Odyssey
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
10/07/17 11:00:06 31TK8600_646
Wiper Blades
6. Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Insert both ends of the blade into
the holder. Make sure they are
secure.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
Maintenance
5. Slide the new blade into the wiper
arm. Make sure it is engaged in
the slot along its full length.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
641
10/07/17 11:00:15 31TK8600_647
Wheels, Tires
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
If equipped
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
642
2011 Odyssey
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 572 or
574 for more information.
10/07/17 11:00:28 31TK8600_648
Tires
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
LX, EX, EX-L models
Tire Size
P235/65R17 103T
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
Touring models
Tire Size
P235/60R18 102T
Cold Tire Pressure for
Normal Driving
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
CONTINUED
643
Maintenance
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot (driven for several
miles/kilometers), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
10/07/17 11:00:41 31TK8600_649
Tires
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Touring models
Tire Size
P235/60R18 102T
For additional information about
your tires, see page 690 .
High Speed Driving
We strongly recommend that you do
not drive faster than the posted
speed limits and conditions allow. If
you ever drive in a sanctioned
competitive event at sustained high
speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
be sure to adjust the cold tire
pressures as shown below. If you do
not, excessive heat can build up and
cause sudden tire failure.
LX, EX, EX-L models
Tire Size
P235/65R17 103T
Cold Tire Pressure
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa ,
2.3 kgf/cm )
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
Cold Tire Pressure
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa ,
2.4 kgf/cm )
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa ,
2.5 kgf/cm )
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
644
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:00:50 31TK8600_650
Tires
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 692 ).
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On all models except LX
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display or multiinformation display (depending on
models). Move the tires to the
positions shown in the diagram each
time they are rotated. If you
purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
645
Maintenance
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
10/07/17 11:00:57 31TK8600_651
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of each wheel.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the
vehicle. Tire size and construction
can affect wheel speed and may
cause the system to activate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
646
2011 Odyssey
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
10/07/17 11:01:07 31TK8600_652
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Wheels:
All models except Touring models
17 x 7J (TPMS)
Touring models
18 x 7J (TPMS)
Tires:
All models except Touring models
P235/65R17 103T
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Touring models
Maintenance
P235/60R18 102T
See page 690 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
692 for tire size and labeling
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
647
10/07/17 11:01:12 31TK8600_653
Tires
Tire Chains
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chain listed
below.
SCC Super Z-6#SZ-429
This is the only chain that has been
approved by Honda for use on your
vehicle. Since Honda cannot test all
chains, you must be personally
responsible for proper selection,
installation, and use of tire chains.
This chain is available at many auto
supply stores. For a complete list of
stores, visit the SCC website at www.
scc-chain.com. When installing
chains, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
648
2011 Odyssey
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
10/07/17 11:01:19 31TK8600_654
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Except Touring models
If there is a problem with the sensor,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK BATT
SENSOR’’ message on the
information display. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
649
Maintenance
The sensor on the negative terminal
monitors your vehicle’s battery
condition.
10/07/17 11:01:27 31TK8600_655
Checking the Battery
On Touring models
If there is a problem with the sensor,
you will see a ‘‘CHECK BATTERY
SENSOR’’ message on the multiinformation display. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
650
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
On vehicles without navigation system
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the time
setting will be reset to 1:00. To set
the time again, follow the setting
procedure (see page 315 ).
On vehicles with navigation system
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
The navigation system will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
navigation system manual.
10/07/17 11:01:37 31TK8600_656
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle twice).
Preferably, do this once a month.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
Maintenance
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Block the rear wheels.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
651
10/07/17 11:01:40 31TK8600_657
Interior Care
Leather
On EX-L and Touring models
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay close
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with a 90% water and 10%
neutral soap solution. Then buff it
with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any
dust or dirt on leather surfaces
immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
652
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:01:44 31TK8600_658
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 654
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 655
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 662
Jump Starting ................................. 665
If the Engine Overheats ............... 667
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 669
Charging System Indicator........... 670
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 671
Brake System Indicator ................ 672
Fuses ............................................... 673
Fuse Locations ............................... 678
Emergency Towing ....................... 683
Taking Care of the Unexpected
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
653
10/07/17 11:01:51 31TK8600_659
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the air pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
654
2011 Odyssey
Except Touring models
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several
miles (kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.
Touring models
After the flat tire is replaced with
the spare tire, the low tire
pressure/TPMS indicator stays on.
After several miles (kilometers)
driving with the spare, this
indicator begins to flash, then
stays on again. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’
message on the multi-information
display (see page 577 ).
10/07/17 11:01:59 31TK8600_660
Compact Spare Tire, Changing a Flat Tire
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
pull over safely. Drive slowly along
the shoulder until you get to an area
far away from traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
If you are towing a trailer,
unhitch it.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED
655
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement tire should be the same
size and design, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
10/07/17 11:02:07 31TK8600_661
Changing a Flat Tire
VINYL STORAGE BAG
FLOOR CARPET
BRACKET
HANDLE
FLOOR LID
3. Move the second row seats to the
rear-most position (see page 176 ).
TOOL KIT CASE
WING BOLT
6. Take the tool kit case out of the
spare tire well.
4. Remove the floor mat under the
second row seats (see page 637 ).
5. Pull up the floor carpet. Raise the
floor lid by lifting up with the
handle, then remove it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
656
2011 Odyssey
BRACKET
MOUNTING
WING BOLT
TIRE
MOUNTING
WING BOLT
JACK
7. Take the jack, vinyl storage bag,
bracket, bracket mounting wing
bolt, and the tire mounting wing
bolt out of the tool kit case.
10/07/17 11:02:15 31TK8600_662
Changing a Flat Tire
8. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
9. Place blocks in front and back of
the wheel diagonally opposite the
tire you are changing.
The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to f it
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other
tool.
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
10.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
2011 Odyssey
11.Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
CONTINUED
657
Taking Care of the Unexpected
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
JACKING POINT
10/07/17 11:02:22 31TK8600_663
Changing a Flat Tire
LX models
WHEEL
NUT
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
EXTENSION
12.Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
13.Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
WHEEL COVER
On LX models
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
658
2011 Odyssey
BRAKE HUB
14.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
10/07/17 11:02:29 31TK8600_664
Changing a Flat Tire
15.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
16.Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
18.Put the flat tire in the supplied
vinyl storage bag.
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
659
Taking Care of the Unexpected
17.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
10/07/17 11:02:38 31TK8600_665
Changing a Flat Tire
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
ATTACHMENT POINT
CARPET PIECE
PLASTIC SCREW
19.Return the third row seat to an
upright position.
20.You will find a U-shaped carpet
piece behind the seat bottom of
the third row seat. Pull up the
U-shaped carpet piece, fold it, and
tack the end under the carpet.
Unfasten the plastic screw with a
coin.
BRACKET
BRACKET MOUNTING WING BOLT
21.Install the bracket and the bracket
mounting wing bolt on the
attachment point as shown, and
tighten the bolt. Make sure the
bracket is securely tightened.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
660
2011 Odyssey
22.Install the flat tire on the bracket
with the inside of the wheel facing
toward you. Install the tire
mounting wing bolt to the bracket
through one of the five wheel nut
holes as shown. Poke a hole in the
vinyl bag as needed. Secure the
flat tire by tightening the tire
mounting wing bolt.
23.Store the jack and tools in the tool
kit case, then store the case in the
spare tire well.
24.Store the plastic screw in a
noticeable place.
Make sure to reinstall the plastic
screw after the flat tire is repaired
and installed on the vehicle.
10/07/17 11:02:48 31TK8600_666
Changing a Flat Tire
25.On LX models
Store the wheel cover in the spare
tire storage area.
Storing a Flat Tire on the Folded
Third Row Seat
You can store the flat tire on the top
of the folded third row seat.
26.Install the floor lid over the spare
tire well. Make sure it is securely
latched.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
27.Install the floor mat under the
second row seats (see page 637 ).
CARPET PIECE
PLASTIC SCREW
1. Turn over the flap on the left side
of the cargo area floor. You will
find a U-shaped carpet piece
behind the seat bottom of the
third row seat. Pull up the
U-shaped carpet piece and remove
the plastic screw with a coin.
2. Place the flat tire face down on the
attachment point. Put the tire
mounting wing bolt in the
attachment point through one of
the five wheel nut holes as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the tire
mounting wing bolt.
3. Follow step 23 through 27 on the
previous page.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
661
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
10/07/17 11:02:55 31TK8600_667
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
662
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:03:00 31TK8600_668
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 665 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 649 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 665 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you see a ‘‘CHECK BATTERY
SENSOR’’ message on the multiinformation display (or ‘‘CHECK
BATT SENSOR’’ message on the
information display on some
models) when you try to start the
engine, the battery is discharged.
If it will not start, see Jump
Starting on page 665 .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 683 .
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
663
10/07/17 11:03:06 31TK8600_669
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 559 .
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 69 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 673 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
664
2011 Odyssey
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 683 .
10/07/17 11:03:15 31TK8600_670
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all electrical accessories:
heater, A/C, climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
3. Remove the upper part of the air
intake duct (see page 626 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
BOOSTER
BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
4. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.
CONTINUED
665
Taking Care of the Unexpected
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
10/07/17 11:03:22 31TK8600_671
Jump Starting
7. Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
8. Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding point
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
666
2011 Odyssey
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
10/07/17 11:03:30 31TK8600_672
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off all
the accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 683 ).
CONTINUED
667
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
10/07/17 11:03:37 31TK8600_673
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat (climate control to
AUTO at ‘‘
’’). Add coolant
to the radiator up to the base of
the filler neck. If you do not have
the proper coolant mixture
available, you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
668
2011 Odyssey
10.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 683 ).
11.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
10/07/17 11:03:44 31TK8600_674
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’ message on
the multi-information display when
this indicator comes on.
1. Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 614 ).
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 545 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
683 ).
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
669
10/07/17 11:03:50 31TK8600_675
Charging System Indicator
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
Except Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGE SYSTEM’’ message on the
information display.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
CHARGING SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
670
2011 Odyssey
If you see a ‘‘REPLACE BATTERY’’
message on the multi-information
display (‘‘CHANGE BATT’’ message
on the information display on some
models), along with this indicator on,
you may need to replace the battery.
Have your vehicle’s battery checked
and replaced by your dealer.
10/07/17 11:03:58 31TK8600_676
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
The indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK
EMISSION SYSTEM’’ message on
the multi-information display.
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 700 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
671
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It can take several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
10/07/17 11:04:06 31TK8600_677
Brake System Indicator
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
U.S.
Canada
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 623 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
On Touring models
On Touring models
You will also see a ‘‘BRAKE FLUID
LOW’’ message on the multiinformation display.
You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM’’ message on the multiinformation display.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
672
2011 Odyssey
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 683 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
indicator come on with the brake
system indicator, have the vehicle
inspected by your dealer
immediately.
10/07/17 11:04:14 31TK8600_678
Fuses
INTERIOR (Driver’s side)
INTERIOR (Passenger’s side)
INTERIOR (Rear)
NOTCH
FUSE LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
five fuse boxes.
NOTCH
The passenger’s side interior fuse
box is under the dashboard. Push
down the tab and slide the cover
upward to remove it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
COVER
The rear fuse box is located at the
left side of cargo area.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
cover to prevent scratches, then
remove it by carefully prying in the
notch on its middle edge with a small
flat-tip screwdriver.
CONTINUED
673
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The driver’s side interior fuse box is
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached to the
side panel.
COVER
10/07/17 11:04:22 31TK8600_679
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD (Primary)
TAB
UNDER-HOOD (Secondary)
TAB
The primary under-hood fuse box is
located on the passenger’s side. The
secondary fuse box is located next to
the battery.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
678 − 682 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid or the fuse label, which
fuse or fuses control that component.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is not the cause. Replace
any blown fuses and check if the
device works.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
To open each under-hood fuse box,
push the tabs as shown.
2. Except the interior fuse box on the
driver’s side
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
674
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:04:29 31TK8600_680
Fuses
FUSE
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
Also check the combined fuse box
in the under-hood fuse box.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse boxes and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
CONTINUED
675
Taking Care of the Unexpected
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
10/07/17 11:04:35 31TK8600_681
Fuses
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace the fuse
with one of the spare fuses of the
same rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper
rating f or the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
676
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:04:39 31TK8600_682
Fuses
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
SPARE FUSES
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Your vehicle has spare fuses on the
back of the primary under-hood fuse
box cover.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
677
10/07/17 11:04:46 31TK8600_683
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
−
−
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
15 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
−
−
−
20 A
10 A
Circuits Protected
−
−
ACG FR
Washer
VBSOL
ECU FR
−
FI Sub
DBW
FI Main
Ignition Coil
−
−
−
Radio
Back Up
No. Amps.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
7.5 A
20 A
−
10 A
−
10 A
−
10 A
−
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
678
2011 Odyssey
Circuits Protected
MG Clutch
Front Fog Lights*
−
Right Headlight High Beam
−
Small Lights
−
Left Headlight High Beam
−
Right Headlight Low Beam
Left Headlight Low Beam
IGPS Oil Level
Cooling Fan
Sub Fan
Wiper Main
10/07/17 11:04:53 31TK8600_684
Fuse Locations
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
125 A
60 A
50 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
3−1
3−2
3−3
3−4
3−5
3−6
50 A
50 A
60 A
50 A
50 A
60 A
3−7
40 A
Battery
Fan Main
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box 2
Rear Blower
FI Main
VSA Motor
Stop & Horn, Hazard
VSA FSR
Battery Management
System Main
Driver’s Side Fuse Box 2
IG1 Main
Rear Fuse Box 1
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box 1
Driver’s Side Fuse Box 1
Primary Under-hood Fuse
Box Main
Front Blower
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
No. Amps.
3−8
40 A
4
5
6
7
8
−
−
40 A
−
7.5 A
9
10
11
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Passenger’s Side Power
Slide Door Motor*
−
−
Rear Window Defogger
−
Battery Management
System
Stop & Horn
Hazard
Interior Lights
* : If equipped
CONTINUED
679
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1
2−1
2−2
2−3
2−4
2−5
2−6
2−7
2−8
Circuits Protected
10/07/17 11:04:59 31TK8600_685
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s side)
No. Amps.
1
2
3
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
−
20 A
10
11
12
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
13
14
15
16
17
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Circuits Protected
Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
(Lock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
Driver’s Door Unlock
Door Lock Main
Not Used
Driver’s Side Power Slide
Door Closer*
Rear Fuse Box
Meter
Primary Under-hood
Fuse Box
Accessory
STS
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Moonroof *
Rear Left Power Window
No. Amps.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
−
20 A
−
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
30
31
32
33
7.5 A
−
20 A
40 A
34
−
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
680
2011 Odyssey
Circuits Protected
−
Driver’s Power Window
−
Fuel Pump
Passenger’s Side Fuse Box
VSA
ACG AS
STRLD
HAC
DRL
ACC Key Lock
Driver’s Power Seat*
Lumbar Support
TPMS
−
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Driver’s Side Power
Slide Door Motor*
−
10/07/17 11:05:07 31TK8600_686
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s side)
No. Amps.
30 A
20 A
10 A
−
20 A
−
20 A
8
20 A
9
10
11
12
13
−
−
−
−
20 A
14
15 A
Premium Amp*
Rear Right Power Window
ACM
−
Seat Heaters*
−
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Sliding*
Front Passenger’s Power
Seat Reclining*
−
−
−
−
Passenger’s Side Power
Slide Door Closer*
Rear Accessory Power
Socket
No. Amps.
15
15 A
16
17
18
−
−
20 A
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
26
27
−
15 A
28
−
Circuits Protected
Front Accessory Power
Socket*
−
−
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
SRS
ECU AS
Auto Leveling Headlight*
−
OPDS
−
Instrument Panel
Illumination
−
Front Accessory Power
Socket
−
* : If equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
681
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Circuits Protected
10/07/17 11:05:14 31TK8600_687
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Rear)
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20 A
−
−
10 A
7.5 A
−
−
−
−
−
Circuits Protected
Power Tailgate Closer*
Not Used
−
Tailgate*
Rear Left Door Lock
−
−
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
682
2011 Odyssey
No. Amps.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
−
10 A
7.5 A
40 A
30 A
−
−
−
* : If equipped
Circuits Protected
Not Used
Rear Wiper
ECU RR
Power Tailgate Motor*
AC Inverter*
−
−
−
10/07/17 11:05:23 31TK8600_688
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are two ways to tow your
vehicle:
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck. This is the best way to
transport your vehicle.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground. This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Release the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
CONTINUED
683
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Start the engine.
Shift to the D position and hold for
5 seconds, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be
transported with the f ront wheels of f
the ground.
10/07/17 11:05:26 31TK8600_689
Emergency Towing
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
684
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:05:30 31TK8600_690
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 698
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 698
Replacement Parts..................... 698
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 699
Emissions Testing ......................... 700
Testing of Readiness Codes ..... 700
Technical Information
Identification Numbers ................. 686
Specifications ................................. 688
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 690
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 690
Treadwear .................................. 690
Traction....................................... 690
Temperature .............................. 691
Tire Labeling .................................. 692
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)−Required Federal
Explanation............................. 694
Emissions Controls........................ 697
The Clean Air Act ...................... 697
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 697
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 697
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 697
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 698
PGM-FI System ..................... 698
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 698
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
685
10/07/17 11:05:34 31TK8600_691
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
686
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:05:40 31TK8600_692
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Except Touring models
Except Touring models
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Touring models
The transmission number is on a
label on the side of the transmission.
ENGINE NUMBER
Touring models
Technical Information
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
687
10/07/17 11:05:55 31TK8600_693
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
202.9 in (5,153 mm)
78.6 in (1,997 mm)
68.4 in (1,737 mm)
118.1 in (3,000 mm)
68.1 in (1,730 mm)
68.2 in (1,732 mm)
Capacities
Fuel tank
See the tire information label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb.
8,477 lbs (3,845 kg)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC
i-VTEC · VCM2, 6-cylinder (V6),
gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10.5 : 1
DILZKR7A11G
NGK:
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Change*1
Total
Change*2
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Total
Windshield
washer
reservoir
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
HFC-134a (R-134a)
24.7−26.5 oz (700−750 g)
ND-OIL8
Approx.
21 US gal (79.5 )
1.93 US gal (7.3 )
2.64 US gal (10.0 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0
3.3 US qt (3.1
3.6 US qt (3.4
8.0 US qt (7.6
7.4 US qt (7.0
2.6 US qt (2.5
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
)
)*3
)
)*3
)
)
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.225 US gal (0.85 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
*
3y:: Touring models
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
d
edb
688
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:06:18 31TK8600_694
Specifications
Lights
Headlights
High
Low
60 W (HB3)
55 W (H11)
35 W (D2S)*1, *3
55 W (H11)
28/8 W (Amber)
Fuses
Interior
Driver’s side
2011 Odyssey
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.07 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−0°30’
2°36’
P235/65R17 103T
P235/60R18 102T *
T135/80D17 103M
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )*
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
8/7 *
2
3/2 *
3
689
Technical Information
Passenger’s side
Fog lights*4
Front turn signal/Parking/Side
Under-hood
marker lights
LED*2
Side turn signal lights*4
Rear
Rear turn signal lights
21 W (Amber)
Stop/Side marker/Taillights
21/5 W
Taillights
3 CP
Back-up lights
21 W
Alignment
Toe-in
Front
License plate lights
5W
Rear
High-mount brake light
16 W
Front
Camber
Front
Individual map lights
8W
Rear
Rear
5W
Caster
Front
Vanity mirror lights
1.4 W
Cargo area light
8W
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Door courtesy lights
3.8 W (2 CP)
Glove box light
1.4 W
LED*2
Spare
Foot light*4
*1 : The low beam headlights are high voltage discharged type.
Pressure
Front/Rear
Replacement of a low beam headlight bulb should be performed
Spare
by your dealer.
*2 : Replacement of a light bulb should be done by your dealer.
* : Touring models
*3 : U.S. Touring Elite and Canadian Touring models
Seating Capacities
*4 : Touring models
Total
Battery
Front
Second row
Capacity
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR
Rear
Third row
12 V − 72 AH/20 HR
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
* : LX models
See page 680 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 681 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 678 and 679 or the fuse
box cover.
See page 682 or the fuse label
attached on the inside of fuse box
lid.
10/07/17 11:06:26 31TK8600_695
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
690
2011 Odyssey
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
10/07/17 11:06:30 31TK8600_696
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
691
10/07/17 11:06:41 31TK8600_697
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
(1)
P235/60R18 102T
P
− Vehicle type (P indicates
passenger vehicle).
235 − Tire width in millimeters.
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(1) Tire Size
(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(3) Maximum Tire Pressure
(4) Maximum Tire Load
R
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
18 − Rim diameter in inches.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
692
2011 Odyssey
102 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
T
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
10/07/17 11:06:51 31TK8600_698
Tire Labeling
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT B97R FX6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Load Rating − Means the maximum
load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure.
Recommended Inflation Pressure −
The cold tire inflation pressure
recommended by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) −
Means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give a
visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread.
Maximum Inflation Pressure − The
maximum tire air pressure that the
tire can hold.
Maximum Load Rating − Means the
load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Technical Information
FX6X − Tire type code.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure − The tire air
pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
2202 − Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
693
10/07/17 11:06:57 31TK8600_699
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
All models
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
Driving on a significantly under
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
694
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:07:03 31TK8600_700
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Except Touring models
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Technical Information
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
695
10/07/17 11:07:08 31TK8600_701
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Touring model
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
696
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:07:15 31TK8600_702
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
612 .
*
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere.
The
positive
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
de
dby:
2011 Odyssey
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
697
Technical Information
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
10/07/17 11:07:25 31TK8600_703
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
698
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
10/07/17 11:07:32 31TK8600_704
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converters
contain precious metals that serve as
catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converters are referred
to as three-way catalysts, since they
act on HC, CO, and NOx.
Replacement units must be original
Honda parts or their equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
699
Technical Information
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
10/07/17 11:07:40 31TK8600_705
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
700
2011 Odyssey
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
10/07/17 11:07:46 31TK8600_706
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T). Do not use the cruise
control. When traffic allows, drive
for 90 seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of
90 seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 30
minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Technical Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
701
10/07/17 11:07:48 31TK8600_707
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
702
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:07:51 31TK8600_708
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 704
Warranty Coverages ..................... 705
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 706
Authorized Manuals ...................... 707
Warranty and Customer Relations
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
703
10/07/17 11:08:00 31TK8600_709
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact Honda
Customer Service.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-Mail: ch_honda_cr@ch.honda.com
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 686 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Odometer reading of your vehicle
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Tel: (800) 999-1009
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
704
2011 Odyssey
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
10/07/17 11:08:09 31TK8600_710
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2011 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2011 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
705
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the emissions control systems and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
10/07/17 11:08:16 31TK8600_711
Reporting Safety Defects
In the US
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also
inform Transport Canada.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and
remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot
become involved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,
DC 20590.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and
Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more
information on reporting safety defects or about motor
vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf ety.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
706
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:08:24 31TK8600_712
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www.helminc.com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61TK800
61TK800EL
31TK8600
31TK8800
31TK8M00
31TK8Q00
HON-R
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Form Description
2011 Honda Odyssey Service Manual
2011 Honda Odyssey
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2011 Model Series Honda Odyssey
Body Repair Manual
2011 Honda Odyssey Owner’s Manual
2011 Honda Odyssey
Navigation System Manual
2011 Honda Odyssey Honda Service History
2011 Honda Odyssey
Technology Reference Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
707
Authorized Manuals
61TK800
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
10/07/17 11:08:32 31TK8600_714
Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 66, 670
Gauge ........................................... 81
Jump Starting ............................. 665
Maintenance ............................... 649
Specifications ............................. 689
Before Driving ............................... 539
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 21
Beverage Holders .......................... 203
Blind Spot Information System
(BSI) ...........................................
. 579
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Bluetooth
HandsFreeLink ................ 495, 516
Booster Seats ................................... 55
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 568
Break-in, New Linings .............. 540
Bulb Replacement ..................... 631
Fluid ............................................ 623
Pad Wear Indicators .................. 567
Parking ........................................ 199
System Indicator .................. 67, 672
Braking System.............................. 567
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 540
Brightness Control,
Instruments ................................ 140
INDEX
Accessories..................................... 549
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ...................................... 147
Accessory Power Socket .............. 211
AC Power Outlet ............................ 212
Active Head Restraints ................. 181
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 614
Advanced Airbag System................ 28
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 24
Air Conditioning System....... 218, 225
Rear A/C Control .............. 224, 230
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 232
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 643
Antifreeze ....................................... 618
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 68, 568
Operation .................................... 568
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 413
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................. 147
Armrests ......................................... 178
Audio Controls, Remote................ 411
Audio System ................................. 234
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .. 140
Automatic Speed Control.............. 480
Automatic Transmission............... 621
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 688
Checking Fluid Level ........ 621, 622
Shifting ........................................ 562
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 561
Shift Lever Positions ................. 563
Shift Lock Release ..................... 565
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 412
CONTINUED
I
10/07/17 11:08:37 31TK8600_715
Index
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 632
Brake Lights............................... 631
Front Parking Lights ................. 628
Front Side Marker Lights......... 628
Front Turn Signal Light ............ 628
Headlights .................................. 625
Rear Bulbs .......................... 631, 632
Rear Turn Signal Light ............. 631
Specifications ............................. 689
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 625
C
Cancel Button................................. 480
Capacities Chart............................. 688
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 58
Cargo Area Light ........................... 215
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 551
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 352
CD Player ....................... 243, 266, 339
CD Player Error
Messages .................... 250, 275, 351
CD Library ...................................... 276
Center Pocket ................................ 209
II
Center Console .............................. 202
Certification Label ......................... 686
Chains, Tires .................................. 648
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 616
When to....................................... 599
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 655
Charging System Indicator .... 66, 670
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 558
Childproof Door Locks ................. 162
Child Safety ...................................... 36
Booster Seats ............................... 55
Child Seats .................................... 44
Important Safety Reminders ...... 35
Infants ........................................... 41
Larger Children ........................... 54
LATCH.......................................... 46
Risks with Airbags....................... 41
Small Children.............................. 42
Tethers.......................................... 52
Where Should A Child Sit? ......... 37
Child Seats ........................................ 44
LATCH Anchorage System ....... 46
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 52
Cleaning
Seat Belts ...................................
. 636
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Climate Control System ................ 225
Clock ............................................... 315
Code, Audio System ...................... 413
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 697
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 559
Compact Spare Tire....................... 654
Consumer Information.................. 704
Controls, Instruments and .............. 61
Conversation Mirror ..................... 207
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 619
Checking ..................................... 545
Proper Solution .......................... 618
Temperature Gauge .................... 77
Cool Box.......................................... 209
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 697
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 75
Cruise Control Operation ............. 480
Cup Holders.................................... 203
Customer Service .......................... 704
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 3, 62
10/07/17 11:08:41 31TK8600_716
Index
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 557
Economy ..................................... 546
Driving Position Memory
System......................................... 190
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 636
DVD Error Message ............. 441, 469
DVD Player ............................ 418, 446
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 546
Emergencies................................... 653
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 665
Brake System Indicator ............ 672
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 655
Charging System Indicator ...... 670
Checking the Fuses................... 674
Driving with a Flat Tire ............ 655
Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 142
Jump Starting ............................. 665
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 669
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 671
Overheated Engine ................... 667
Towing ........................................ 588
Emergency Brake
. 199
I
nf
or
mat
i
on.........................
Pr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Emergency Flashers ..................... 142
Emergency Towing ....................... 683
Emissions Controls........................ 697
Emissions Testing ......................... 700
Engine
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 77
Engine Speed Limiter ............... 564
If It Won’t Start .......................... 662
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 66, 671
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 66, 669
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 614
Overheating................................ 667
Specifications ............................. 688
Starting........................................ 559
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 697
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 58
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 698
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 18
INDEX
Daytime Running Lights............... 139
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 73
Dead Battery .................................. 665
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 706
Defogger, Rear Window ............... 142
Defrosting the Windows....... 220, 229
Dimensions ..................................... 688
Dimming the Headlights .............. 136
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission .. 621, 622
Engine Oil ................................... 545
Directional Signals......................... 136
Disc Brake Pad Wear
Indicators .................................... 567
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 617
Doors
Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking ............................... 157
Locking and Unlocking ............. 155
Lockout Prevention ................... 156
Manual Sliding Doors ............... 167
Open monitor ......................... 11, 75
Power Door Locks ..................... 155
Power Sliding Doors.................. 167
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 690
CONTINUED
III
10/07/17 11:08:46 31TK8600_717
Index
F
Fan, Interior ........................... 219, 228
Features .......................................... 217
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 541
Filters
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 636
Oil ................................................ 616
Flashers, Hazard Warning............ 142
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 655
Floor Mats ...................................... 637
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 621
Brake ........................................... 623
Power Steering........................... 624
Windshield Washers ................. 620
FM Stereo Radio
Reception .................................... 409
Folding the Third Row Seat ......... 185
Four-way Flashers ......................... 142
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 26
Front Seat ....................................... 175
Adjusting............................. 175, 176
Heaters........................................ 189
Airbags ...................................... 9, 26
IV
Fuel .................................................. 540
Economy ..................................... 546
Fill Door and Cap....................... 541
Gauge ............................................ 77
Octane Requirement ................. 540
Refueling..................................... 541
Reserve Indicator......................... 74
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 674
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 547
Gasoline .......................................... 540
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 74
Gauge ............................................ 77
Octane Requirement ................. 540
Refueling..................................... 541
Gas Station Procedures................. 541
Gauges
Battery Charge Low .............. .... 81
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 77
Fuel ................................................ 77
Speedometer ................................ 77
Tachometer .................................. 77
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) .......................................
. 589
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) ........................................ 589
Glove Box ....................................... 208
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 589
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 625
HandsFreeLink .................... 495, 516
Hazard Warning Flashers............. 142
Headlights ...................................... 136
Aiming ......................................... 625
Automatic Lighting Off ............. 140
Daytime Running Lights .......... 139
High Beam Indicator ................... 73
Reminder Chime........................ 137
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 625
Turning on .................................. 136
Headphones.................................... 471
Head Restraints ............................. 179
Heated Mirror ................................ 199
Heater, Seat .................................... 189
Heating and Cooling ...................... 218
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 559
High-Low Beam Switch ................ 136
10/07/17 11:08:53 31TK8600_718
Index
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 483
Hood, Opening the ........................ 544
Horn ............................................ 4, 134
I
2011 Odyssey
Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 140
Integrated Sunshade ..................... 205
Interior Lights ................................ 213
Introduction ......................................... i
iPod ........................................ 286, 383
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 657
Jack, Tire ........................................ 656
Jump Starting ................................. 665
K
Keys ................................................. 144
L
Label, Certification ........................ 686
Lane Change, Signaling ................ 136
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 15, 21
LATCH Anchorage System............ 46
Light Control Switch ..................... 213
CONTINUED
V
INDEX
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 686
Ignition
Keys............................................. 144
Switch .......................................... 147
Timing Control System ............. 698
Immobilizer System....................... 145
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Indicators .................................... 63, 64
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ....... 68, 568
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................ 67, 672
Charging System ................. 66, 670
Cruise Control .............................. 75
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights) ...................................... 73
Indicators
Fog Light ...................................... 73
Fuel Economy .............................. 75
High Beam.................................... 73
Key (Immobilizer System) ........ 69
Lights On ...................................... 73
Low Fuel ....................................... 74
Low Oil Pressure ................. 66, 669
Low Tire Pressure ....... 71, 572, 575
Maintenance MinderTM.............. 599
Side Airbag Off ...................... 33, 68
SRS .......................................... 32, 67
System Message .......................... 76
TPMS ............................ 72, 573, 575
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 72
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA ) System ................ 69, 570
VSA Activation ............................. 69
Washer Level ............................... 74
Individual Map Lights ................... 214
Infant Restraint ................................ 41
Infant Seats ....................................... 41
LATCH Anchorage System ....... 46
Lower Anchors ............................ 46
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 52
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 643
Inside Mirror .................................. 197
Inspection, Tire .............................. 644
Instrument Panel
......................
. 4, 134
I
nf
or
mat
i
on
Pr
ovi
dedby:
10/07/17 11:08:59 31TK8600_719
Index
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 625
Indicator ........................................ 73
Interior ........................................ 213
Parking ........................................ 136
Turn Signal ................................. 136
Load Limits............................. 552, 588
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ..... 147
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ...... 147
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 541
Glove Box ................................... 208
Lockout Prevention ................... 156
Power Door ................................ 155
Sliding Doors.............. 155, 169, 172
Tailgate ............................... 162, 163
Low Coolant Level ......................... 545
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 74
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 66, 669
Lower Anchors................................. 46
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 688
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 551
M
O
Maintenance ................................... 597
Minder......................................... 599
Minder Indicator .......................... 76
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 611
Safety........................................... 598
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 66, 671
Manual Sliding Doors.................... 172
Meters, Gauges ................................ 77
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 197
Modifications.................................. 549
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 550
Moonroof ........................................ 195
Moving the Second Row Outer
Seat .............................................. 184
Multi-Information Display .............. 83
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 563
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 540
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 686
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VI
2011 Odyssey
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 540
Odometer .................................... 78, 85
Odometer, Trip .......................... 78, 85
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 616
Change, When to ....................... 599
Checking Engine ....................... 545
Pressure Indicator ............... 66, 669
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 615
ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 147
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 697
Outside Mirrors ............................. 198
Overheating, Engine ..................... 667
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 611
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 540
P
Panel Brightness Control ............. 140
Park Gear Position......................... 563
Parking ............................................ 566
Parking Brake ................................ 199
10/07/17 11:09:04 31TK8600_720
Index
R
Radiator Overheating .................... 667
Radio/Disc Sound System ............ 234
Readiness Codes ............................ 700
Rear Audio Control Panel ..... 414, 442
Rear A/C Unit ........................ 224, 230
Rear Entertainment
System................................. 414, 442
Rear Lights, Bulb
Replacement ....................... 631, 632
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 493
Rear View Mirror........................... 197
Rear Window Defogger ................ 142
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer ........................................ 136
Reclining the Seat Backs ...... 175, 177
Reclining the Second Row Seats.. 177
Reclining the Third Row Seat ...... 177
Reminder Indicators ........................ 65
Remote Audio Controls................. 411
Remote Control (RES) ......... 414, 442
Remote Transmitter ...................... 148
Removable Center Console .......... 202
Removing the Second Row
Seats ...........................................
. 184
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Replacement Information
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 616
Fuses ........................................... 675
Light Bulbs ................................. 625
Timing Belt ................................. 624
Tires ............................................ 646
Wiper Blades .............................. 638
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 23
Reporting Safety Defects.............. 706
Reserve Tank,
Engine Coolant .................. 545, 618
Reverse Gear Position................... 563
Roof Rack ....................................... 554
Rotation, Tire ................................. 645
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 20
Safety Defects, Reporting............. 706
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 59
CONTINUED
VII
INDEX
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 67, 672
Parking Lights................................ 136
Parking Sensor System ................. 486
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 566
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 33
PGM-FI System.............................. 698
Power Door Locks ......................... 155
Power Sliding Doors
Indicator ........................................ 75
Operation .................................... 167
Switches ...................................... 169
Power Socket Locations................ 211
Power Tailgate ............................... 163
Power Windows ............................. 192
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Protecting Children ......................... 36
Protecting Infants ........................ 41
Protecting Larger Children ........ 54
Protecting Small Children .......... 42
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 52
Using LATCH .............................. 46
10/07/17 11:09:09 31TK8600_721
Index
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 20
Additional Information ................ 20
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 22
Cleaning ...................................... 636
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21
Maintenance ................................. 23
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ................................. 20, 65
Replacement ................................. 23
System Components.................... 20
Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 15
Seat Heaters ................................... 189
Seats ................................................ 175
Adjustments ....................... 175, 176
Drivers Lumbar Support ........... 175
Folding the Third Row Seat ..... 185
Head Restraints ......................... 179
Passenger Seating ..................... 175
Reclining the Third Row Seat .. 177
Removing the Second Row
Seats ........................................ 183
VIII
Removing the Second Row
Multi-Functional Center
Seat ...................................... 184
Third Row Seat Access ............. 182
Security System ............................. 479
Sensors
Front Passenger’s Weight
Sensors...................................... 29
Driver’s Seat Position Sensor ..... 29
Serial Number ................................ 686
Service Intervals ............................ 599
Service Manual .............................. 707
Service Station Procedure ............ 541
Setting the Clock ........................... 315
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 561
Shift Lock Release ......................... 565
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 30
Off Indicator ........................... 33, 68
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 628
Signaling Turns .............................. 136
Sliding Doors .................................. 167
Snow Tires ...................................... 647
Sound System ................................. 234
Spare Tire
Inflating..............................
. 644, 654
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Specifications ............................. 689
Specifications Charts..................... 688
Speed Control ................................. 480
Speedometer .................................... 77
SRS, Additional Information........... 24
Additional Safety Precautions .... 35
Airbag Service .............................. 34
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32
How Your Airbags
Work ............................. 26, 30, 31
SRS Components ......................... 24
SRS Indicator.............................. 32, 67
START (Ignition Key Position) ... 147
Starting the Engine........................ 559
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 559
With a Dead Battery ................. 665
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 667
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................. 143
Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 147
Buttons ......... 83, 411, 480, 496, 517
Stereo Sound System .................... 234
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 651
Second Row Multi-Functional
Center Seat ................................. 184
10/07/17 11:09:14 31TK8600_722
Index
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 206
Sun Visor......................................... 207
Supplemental Restraint System
Servicing ....................................... 34
SRS Indicator.......................... 32, 67
System Components.................... 24
Synthetic Oil ................................... 615
T
2011 Odyssey
Emergency Wrecker ................. 683
Equipment and Accessories ..... 590
Weight Limit .............................. 588
Trailer Loading .............................. 588
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 594
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level ................ 621
Fluid Selection............................ 622
Identification Number............... 686
Shifting the Automatic .............. 562
Treadwear ...................................... 644
Trip Meter ................................ 85, 313
Turn Signals ................................... 136
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 653
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 690
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 540
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 617
INDEX
Tachometer ...................................... 77
Tailgate ........................................... 162
Opening the ........................ 162, 163
Open Monitor Indicator ........ 75, 90
Taillights, Changing Bulbs ... 631, 632
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 653
Technical Descriptions
Emissions Control Systems ...... 697
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 699
Temperature Gauge ........................ 77
Temperature, Inside Sensor ......... 233
Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 22
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 52
Theft Protection, Radio................. 413
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 699
Tilt and Telescoping the
Steering Wheel .......................... 143
Time, Setting the ........................... 315
Timing Belt ..................................... 624
Tire Chains ..................................... 648
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 655
Tires ................................................ 642
Air Pressure ............................... 643
Balancing .................................... 645
Checking Wear .......................... 644
Compact Spare ........................... 654
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 690
Inflation ....................................... 642
Inspection ................................... 644
Labeling ...................................... 692
Replacing .................................... 646
Rotating....................................... 645
Service Life ................................. 645
Snow ............................................ 647
Specifications ............................. 689
Tire Chains ................................. 648
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............. 572, 574
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 656
Towing
A Trailer .....................................
. 588
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
CONTINUED
IX
10/07/17 11:09:19 31TK8600_723
Index
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 208
Vehicle Capacity Load .......... 552, 588
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 688
Vehicle Identification Number..... 686
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA ) .................................. 69, 570
Vehicle Storage .............................. 651
Ventilation ...................................... 221
VIN .................................................. 686
Viscosity, Oil................................... 615
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 59
Warranty Coverages ..................... 705
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 620
Level Indicator ............................. 74
Operation .................................... 135
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering .............. 143
Alignment and Balance ............. 645
Compact Spare ........................... 654
X
Wrench ....................................... 657
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 193
Operating the Power ................. 192
Rear, Defogger .......................... 142
Windshield
Cleaning ...................................... 135
Defroster ............................ 220, 229
Washers ...................................... 135
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 638
Operation .................................... 135
Rear Windshield Wiper and
Washer .................................... 136
Wireless Headphones ................... 471
Worn Tires ..................................... 644
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 683
X
XM Radio .............................. 260, 332
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
10/07/17 11:09:34 31TK8600_725
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
21 US gal (79.5 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 0W-20
detergent oil (see page 614 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 624 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 623 ).
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic
transmission fluid) (see page 621 ).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
LX, EX and EX-L models:
Front/Rear:
33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )
Touring models:
Front/Rear:
35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
10/07/17 09:33:44 31TK8600_001
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Odyssey. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
Images throughout this owner’s manual
(including the front cover) represent
features and equipment that are available on
some, but not all, models. Your particular
model may not have some of these features.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2011 Odyssey
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33TK8C00
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising